Pontiac Bonneville 2000 Owner's Manual
advertisement
Bumper-to-Bumper
3-years/36,000 miles (60 000 km)
Limited Warranty
Every
2000 Bonneville under warranty is backed with the following services:
Courtesy
Transportation
( (
For vehicles purchased in Canada,
that provides in an emergency:
Free
lockout assistance
Free
dead-battery assistance
Free
out-of-fuel assistance
Free
flat-tire change
Emergency towing
2000 Pontiac Bonneville
Owner's Manual
Litho in U.S.A.
Part Number 25694662 A First Edition
© Copyright General Motors Corporation 1999
All Rights Reserved i
ii
Table of Contents
Seats and Restraint Systems
Remote Keyless Entry System (If Equipped)
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Features and Controls
HomeLink® Transmitter (If Equipped)
Instrument Panel, Warning Lights and Gages
Driver Information Center (Option)
Table of Contents (cont'd)
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
Radio/Cassette Player/CD Player
Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)
Your Driving and the Road
Driving Tips for Various Road Conditions
Problems on the Road
iii
iv
Table of Contents (cont'd)
Service and Appearance Care
Checking Fluids and Lubricants
GM Oil Life System™ (If Equipped)
Passenger Compartment Air Filter (If Equipped)
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Electrical System/Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Maintenance Schedule
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Table of Contents (cont'd)
Customer Assistance Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedures
Roadside Assistance and Courtesy Transportation
Warranty Information (See Warranty Manual)
Reporting Safety Defects on page 8-12
Section 9
Index
In the Index you will find an alphabetical listing of almost every subject in this manual.
You can use it to quickly find something you want to read.
Please refer to the last page of this manual for your
Service Station Guide
v
We support voluntary technician certification.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
PONTIAC, the PONTIAC Emblem and the name
BONNEVILLE are registered trademarks of General
Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes in the product after that time without further notice.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
“General Motors of Canada Limited” for Pontiac
Division whenever it appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the new owner can use it.
For Canadian Owners Who Prefer a
French Language Manual:
Aux propriétaires canadiens: Vous pouvez vous procurer un exemplaire de ce guide en français chez votre concessionaire ou au:
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1577 Meyerside Dr.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1B9
vi
How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning to end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you do this, it will help you learn about the features and controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find that pictures and words work together to explain things quickly.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t, you or others could be hurt.
You will also find a circle with a slash through it in this book. This safety symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let this happen.”
vii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
NOTICE:
These mean there is something that could damage your vehicle.
In the notice area, we tell you about something that can damage your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
viii
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find on your vehicle.
For example, these symbols are used on an original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
These symbols are important for you and your passengers whenever your vehicle is driven:
These symbols have to do with your lamps:
MASTER
LIGHTING
SWITCH
These symbols are on some of your controls:
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
DOOR LOCK
UNLOCK
TURN
SIGNALS
WINDSHIELD
WASHER
PARKING
LAMPS CAUSTIC
BATTERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
HAZARD
WARNING
FLASHER
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
POWER
WINDOW
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LAMPS
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
AIR BAG FOG LAMPS
VENTILATING
FAN
These symbols are used on warning and indicator lights:
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMP
BATTERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
BRAKE
COOLANT
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
Here are some other symbols you may see:
FUSE
LIGHTER
HORN
SPEAKER
FUEL
ix
Service Station Guide
For a More
Detailed Look at
What's Under the Hood
Windshield Washer
Fluid
Cooling System
Tire Pressure
Battery
Spare Tire Pressure
Hood Release
Alternate
Fuel Door Release
Engine Oil Dipstick
Oil Viscosity
Fuel
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’ll find information about the seats in your vehicle and how to use your safety belts properly. You can also learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
1 11 Here Are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts - and the Answers
1 12 How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
1 19 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
1 20 Right Front Passenger Position
1 29 Center Passenger Position
1 52 Checking Your Restraint Systems
1 52 Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash
1-
1-1
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the seats - how to adjust them - and also about reclining seatbacks and head restraints.
Manual Front Seat
CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Pull up on the control bar located under the front of the seat to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it.
Then release the bar and try to move the seat with your body to make sure the seat is locked into place.
Power Seat (If Equipped)
The controls for the power seats are located on the outboard side of each front seat.
1-2
To adjust the power seats:
Horizontal Control: Raise or lower the front of the seat by pressing the forward edge of the control up or down.
Raise or lower the rear of the seat by holding the rear edge of the control up or down.
Move the seat higher or lower by holding the whole control up or down.
Vertical Control (Option): Move the seatback into a recline position by pressing the top of the control back.
Move the seatback forward by pressing the top of the control forward.
Power Lumbar Control (Option)
The lumbar control is located on the outboard side of each front seat.
Use the power seat control first to get the proper position. Then proceed with the lumbar adjustment.
To reshape the lower seatback, press the lumbar control forward to increase support and rearward to decrease support. Press the control up or down to raise or lower the support mechanism.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as it may during long trips, so should the position of your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
1-3
Memory Seat and Mirrors (Option)
The controls for the memory seat and mirrors are located on the driver’s door panel, and are used to program and recall previous settings that have been stored.
Adjust the driver’s seat (including the lumbar adjustments) and both the outside mirrors to the position for driving. Then press and hold button 1 for five seconds. A double beep will sound when the memory is set.
To set the seat and mirror positions for a second driver, follow the previous steps, but press button 2 instead.
When your vehicle is in PARK (P) and a memory button is pressed, a single beep will sound through the audio system and the memory position will be recalled.
You can also store an exit position for each driver. The exit position will be set for the most recently selected driver position (1 or 2). The exit position is programmed by moving to the desired exit position and then holding the exit button for five seconds.
The exit position will be recalled when the exit button is pressed and will correspond to the driving position that was recalled last.
Note that selecting a new position with the memory button will change all of the other personalization features that you have programmed also. See
“Personalization Programming” in the Index for more information.
Memory seat and exit recall will only work when the automatic transaxle is in PARK (P).
1-4
Heated Front Seats (Option)
This option is only available if your vehicle is equipped with the power lumbar control.
The front seat controls are located on the center console.
Reclining Front Seatbacks
If your vehicle has a power recliner, the vertical control described previously in this section reclines the front seatbacks.
Push the ON part of the button once for a HI setting or twice for a LO setting. Push the OFF part of the button to turn the heated seat off. The LO setting warms the seatback and cushion until the seat approximates body temperature. The HI setting heats the seatback and cushion to a slightly higher temperature.
The heated seats can only be used when the ignition is turned on. The heated elements in the seats automatically turn off when the vehicle’s ignition is turned off.
If your vehicle has the manual recliner, lift the lever on the outer side of the seat and move the seatback to the desired position. Release the lever to lock the seatback.
Pull up on the lever and the seat will go to an upright position.
1-5
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.
CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job when you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job. In a crash you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly.
1-6
Head Restraints
Slide the head restraint up or down so that the top of the restraint is closest to the top of your ears. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety belts properly. It also tells you some things you should not do with safety belts.
And it explains the air bag system.
CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt, your injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passengers’ belts are fastened properly too.
CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light that comes on as a reminder to buckle up. (See “Safety
Belt Reminder Light” in the Index.)
1-7
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does matter ... a lot!
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat on wheels.
1-8
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider doesn’t stop.
1-9
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield ...
or the instrument panel ...
1-10
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why safety belts make such good sense.
Here Are Questions Many People Ask
About Safety Belts
--
and the Answers
Q:
Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be - whether you’re wearing a safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you’re upside down. And your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q:
If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to wear safety belts?
A:
Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be in most of them in the future. But they are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts - not instead of them. Every air bag system ever offered for sale has required the use of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions, but especially in side and other collisions.
1-11
Q:
If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from home, why should I wear safety belts?
A:
You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an accident - even one that isn’t your fault - you and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of home. And the greatest number of serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Adults
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see the part of this manual called “Children.” Follow those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
1-12
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap shoulder belt. Here’s how to wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index) so you can sit up straight.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The lap shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-13
1-14
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly as much protection this way.
1-15
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-16
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen.
1-17
Q:
What’s wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-18
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-19
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety belt properly, see “Driver Position” earlier in this section.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same way as the driver’s safety belt - except for one thing.
If you ever pull the lap portion of the belt out all the way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way and start again.
If your vehicle has a center passenger position, be sure to use the correct buckle when buckling your lap shoulder belt. If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle, see if you are using the buckle for the center passenger position.
Air Bag Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact air bag systems.
Your vehicle has four air bags - a frontal air bag for the driver, another frontal air bag for the right front passenger, a side impact air bag for the driver, and another side impact air bag for the right front passenger.
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag.
But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the air bag systems:
1-20
CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you aren’t wearing your safety belt - even if you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Air bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety belts. All air bags are designed to work with safety belts but don’t replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
Frontal air bags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to work only in moderate to severe crashes where the front of your vehicle hits something. They aren’t designed to inflate at all in rollover, rear, side or low speed frontal crashes. And, for unrestrained occupants, frontal air bags may provide less protection in frontal crashes than more forceful air bags have provided in the past. The side impact air bags for the driver and right front passenger are designed to inflate only in moderate to severe crashes where something hits the side of your vehicle.
They aren’t designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in rear crashes. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly - whether or not there’s an air bag for that person.
1-21
CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate with great force, faster than the blink of an eye. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag, as you would be if you were leaning forward, it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you in position for air bag inflation before and during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with frontal air bags. The driver should sit as far back as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. Front occupants should not lean on or sleep against the door.
CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To read how, see the part of this manual called “Children.”
1-22
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows
AIR BAG.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light” in the Index for more information.
How the Air Bag Systems Work
Where are the air bags?
The driver’s frontal air bag is in the middle of the steering wheel.
1-23
The right front passenger’s frontal air bag is in the instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The driver’s side impact air bag is in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.
The right front passenger’s side impact air bag is in the side of the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.
1-24
CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person.
The path of an inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put anything between an occupant and an air bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other air bag covering and don’t let seat covers block the inflation path of a side impact air bag.
When should an air bag inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal crashes. The frontal air bags are designed to inflate only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed “threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level is about 11 to 16 mph (18 to 26 km/h). The threshold level can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or below this range. If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, side impacts, or rear impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant.
The side impact air bags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact air bag will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are not designed to inflate in frontal or near frontal impacts, rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air bag should have inflated simply because of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down in frontal and near frontal impacts. For side impact air bags, inflation is determined by the location and severity of the impact.
1-25
What makes an air bag inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related hardware are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering wheel, instrument panel and the side of the front seatbacks closest to the door.
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the frontal air bags would not help you in many types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward the air bag. Side impact air bags would not help you in many types of collisions, including frontal or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags, and only in moderate to severe side collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s side impact air bags.
What will you see after an air bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that some people may not even realize the air bag inflated. Some components of the air bag module - the steering wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag, the side of the seatback closest to the door for the driver and right front passenger’s side impact air bags - will be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.
There will be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
1-26
CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the air.
This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or a door.
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the air bags inflate (if battery power is available). You can lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off by using the door lock and interior lamp controls.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag, windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the right front passenger air bag.
D Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system won’t be there to help protect you in another crash. A new system will include air bag modules and possibly other parts. The service manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
D Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic module, which records information about the frontal air bag system. The module records information about the readiness of the system, when the system commands air bag inflation and driver’s safety belt usage at deployment. Some modules also record speed, engine rpm, brake and throttle data.
D Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag systems. Improper service can mean that an air bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer for service.
1-27
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the right front passenger’s air bag, or the air bag covering on the driver’s and right front passenger’s seatback, the bag may not work properly. You may have to replace the air bag module in the steering wheel, both the air bag module and the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s air bag, or both the air bag module and seatback for the driver’s and right front passenger’s side impact air bag. Do not open or break the air bag coverings.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systems in several places around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service manual have information about servicing your vehicle and the air bag systems. To purchase a service manual, see
“Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an air bag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an air bag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the air bag systems. Be sure to follow proper service procedures, and make sure the person performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-28
Center Passenger Position
Lap Belt
If your vehicle has front and rear bench seats, someone can sit in the center positions.
When you sit in a center seating position, you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along the belt.
1-29
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap part of a lap shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
Rear Seat Passengers
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
1-30
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions
Lap
-
Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap shoulder belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1-31
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-32
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
1-33
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! That includes infants and all children smaller than adult size. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Smaller Children and Babies
CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any air bag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Air bags plus lap shoulder belts offer the best protection for adults, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide.
Always secure children properly in your vehicle.
1-34
CAUTION:
Smaller children and babies should always be restrained in a child or infant restraint. The instructions for the restraint will say whether it is the right type and size for your child.
A very young child’s hip bones are so small that a regular belt might not stay low on the hips, as it should. Instead, the belt will likely be over the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force right on the child’s abdomen, which could cause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure that any child small enough for one is always properly restrained in a child or infant restraint.
Infants need complete support, including support for the head and neck. This is necessary because an infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared with the rest of its body. In a frontal crash, an infant in a rear facing restraint settles into the restraint, so the crash forces can be distributed across the strongest part of the infant’s body, the back and shoulders. A baby should be secured in an appropriate infant restraint. This is so important that many hospitals today won’t release a newborn infant to its parents unless there is an infant restraint available for the baby’s first trip in a motor vehicle.
1-35
CAUTION:
Never hold a baby in your arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much - until a crash. During a crash a baby will become so heavy you can’t hold it. For example, in a crash
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-36
CAUTION: (Continued) at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a 240 lb. (110 kg) force on your arms. The baby would be almost impossible to hold.
Secure the baby in an infant restraint.
Child Restraints
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should have protection provided by appropriate restraints.
Q:
What are the different types of add on child restraints?
A:
Add on child restraints are available in four basic types. When selecting a child restraint, take into consideration not only the child’s weight and size, but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used.
An infant car bed (A) is a special bed made for use in a motor vehicle. It’s an infant restraint system designed to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat surface. With an infant car bed, make sure that the infant’s head rests toward the center of the vehicle.
1-37
1-38
A rear facing infant restraint (B) positions an infant to face the rear of the vehicle. Rear facing infant restraints are designed for infants of up to about
20 lbs. (9 kg) and about one year of age. This type of restraint faces the rear so that the infant’s head, neck and body can have the support they need in a frontal crash. Some infant seats come in two parts - the base stays secured in the vehicle and the seat part is removable.
A forward facing child restraint (C E) positions a child upright to face forward in the vehicle.
These forward facing restraints are designed to help protect children who are from 20 to 40 lbs.
(9 to 18 kg) and about 26 to 40 inches
(66 to 102 cm) in height, or up to around four years of age. One type, a convertible restraint, is designed to be used either as a rear facing infant seat or a forward facing child seat.
1-39
1-40
A booster seat (F) is designed for children who are about 40 to 60 lbs., or even up to 80 lbs.
(18 to 27 kg, or even up to 36 kg), and about four to eight years of age. A booster seat is designed to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Booster seats with shields use lap only belts; however, booster seats without shields use lap shoulder belts. Booster seats can also help a child to see out the window.
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
The instructions that come with the infant or child restraint will show you how to do that. Both the owner’s manual and the child restraint instructions are important, so if either one of these is not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We at
General Motors therefore recommend that you put your child restraint in the rear seat. Never put a rear facing child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:
CAUTION:
A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear facing child restraint in a rear seat.
You may secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat, but before you do, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
CAUTION:
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the right front passenger air bag if it inflates. Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat. It’s always better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat.
You may secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat, but before you do, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle - even when no child is in it.
1-41
Top Strap
Your vehicle has top strap anchors already installed for the rear seating positions. You’ll find them behind the rear seat on the filler panel.
In order to get to a bracket, you’ll have to open the trim cover.
In Canada, the law requires that forward facing child restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be anchored. In the United States, some child restraints also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a top strap, it should be anchored.
Anchor the top strap to this bracket. Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready to secure the child restraint itself.
1-42
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint.
1-43
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. To tighten the belt, pull up on the shoulder belt while you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using a forward facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.
1-44
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Rear Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap belt. Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.
CAUTION:
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the right front passenger air bag if it inflates. Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat. It’s always better to secure a child restraint in the rear seat.
You may secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat, but before you do, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
1-45
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using a forward facing child restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.
1-46
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag. Never put a rear facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:
Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a forward facing child restraint in the right front seat.
You’ll be using the lap shoulder belt. See the earlier part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will go before securing a forward facing child restraint.
(See “Seats” in the Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or neck, put it behind the child restraint.
CAUTION:
A child in a rear facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because the back of the rear facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear facing child restraint in the rear seat.
1-47
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock.
1-48
Larger Children
6. To tighten the belt, feed the lap belt back into the retractor while you push down on the child restraint.
You may find it helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or larger child passenger.
Children who have outgrown child restraints should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a window so the child can wear a lap shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-49
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are restrained in the rear seat. But they need to use the safety belts properly.
D Children who aren’t buckled up can be thrown out in a crash.
D Children who aren’t buckled up can strike other people who are.
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact forces.
In a crash, the two children can be crushed together and seriously injured. A belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Q:
What if a child is wearing a lap shoulder belt, but the child is so small that the shoulder belt is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center of the vehicle, but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have the restraint that belts provide. If the child is so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to the child’s face or neck, you might want to place the child in the center seat position, the one that has only a lap belt.
1-50
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a lap shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind the child. If the child wears the belt in this way, in a crash the child might slide under the belt.
The belt’s force would then be applied right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
1-51
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will be long enough for you. The extender will be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.)
1-52
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if worn during a more severe crash, then you need new belts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision damage also may mean you will need to have safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used at the time of the collision.
If your seat adjuster won’t work after a crash, the special part of the safety belt that goes through the seat to the adjuster may need to be replaced.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier in this section.
Section 2 Features and Controls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting, shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems that tell you if everything is working properly - and what to do if you have a problem.
Remote Keyless Entry (If Equipped)
2 16 Universal Theft Deterrent (Option)
2 22 Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
2 23 Automatic Transaxle Operation
2 31 Parking Over Things That Burn
2 32 Running Your Engine While You’re Parked
2 34 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
2 52 Air Inflator System (Option)
2 58 The Instrument Panel - Your
2 64 Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
2 84 Driver Information Center (DIC) (Option)
2-
2-1
Keys
CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons. A child or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. Don’t leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
2-2
There is a master key that works in all of the lock cylinders (driver’s door, trunk, ignition and glove box).
There is also a VALET key which only operates the driver’s door and the ignition.
Both the master and VALET key have a transponder embedded into the key for security and theft deterrence.
The keys also come with a bar code tag. Keep the bar code tag in a safe place. If you lose your key, you will be able to have a new one made using the bar code tag.
The replacement key must have a transponder embedded in it.
If you need a new key, contact your dealer who can obtain the correct key code. Remember to carry the pre cut emergency key which Pontiac sends after delivery. (This service is unavailable in Canada.)
In an emergency, call Pontiac Roadside Assistance at
1 800 ROADSIDE (1 800 762 3743).
In Canada, call 1 800 268 6800.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle has a number of features that can help prevent theft. But you can have a lot of trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock your keys inside. You may even have to damage your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have extra keys.
2-3
Door Locks
CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers - especially children - can easily open the doors and fall out. When a door is locked, the inside handle won’t open it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
This may not be so obvious: You increase the chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts properly, lock your doors, and you will be far better off whenever you drive your vehicle.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your key or remote keyless entry transmitter, if your vehicle has this feature. With your door key, turning the key toward the rear of the vehicle will unlock the door and turning the key toward the front of the vehicle will lock it.
2-4
If your vehicle has a theft deterrent system and it is activated, unlock the doors only with the key or remote keyless entry system. This will avoid setting off the alarm. See “Universal Theft Deterrent” in the Index for more information.
To lock the door from the inside, push the manual locking lever forward. To unlock the door, push the manual locking lever rearward.
Central Door Unlocking System
If your vehicle has a theft deterrent system, all doors will unlock if the key is held in the outside key cylinder unlock position for more than two seconds. The doors will also unlock if the key is turned to the unlock position twice in three seconds.
Power Door Locks
With power door locks, you can lock or unlock all the doors of your vehicle using the driver’s or front passenger’s door lock switch.
Programmable Automatic Door Locks
Close the doors and turn on the ignition. Every time you move the shift lever out of PARK (P), all of the doors will lock. And, every time you stop and move the shift lever into PARK (P), the doors will unlock. If someone needs to get out while you’re not in PARK (P), have that person use the manual or power door lock switch. When the door is closed again, it will not lock automatically.
Just use the manual or power door lock switch to lock the door again.
Overriding Lock Delay
If you need to lock your doors before shifting out of
PARK (P), just use the manual or power door lock switch to lock the doors.
Personalization Programming
You can program the automatic door lock feature to change to the following modes:
Mode 0: No automatic door lock or unlock.
Mode 1: All doors automatically lock when shifted out of PARK (P). No automatic door unlock.
Mode 2: All doors automatically lock when shifted out of PARK (P). Only the driver’s door automatically unlocks when shifted into PARK (P).
2-5
Mode 3: All doors automatically lock when shifted out of PARK (P). All doors automatically unlock when shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 4: All doors automatically lock when shifted out of
PARK (P). Only the driver’s door automatically unlocks when the key is turned to OFF. (DIC equipped vehicles only)
Mode 5: All doors automatically lock when shifted out of PARK (P). All doors automatically unlock when the key is turned to OFF. (DIC equipped vehicles only)
Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with remote keyless entry, use the following procedure to change modes:
1. Keep all doors closed, vehicle in PARK (P) and the ignition on throughout this procedure.
2. Press and hold the driver’s power door lock switch in the LOCK position through Step 3.
3. Cycle the shift lever, starting in PARK (P), out of
PARK (P) and then back into PARK (P), to advance by one mode for each cycle.
After the first cycle, you will hear a door locking action, which identifies the current mode.
4. Release the power door lock switch. The automatic door locks will remain in the most recent mode selected.
2-6
If your vehicle is equipped with remote keyless entry, use the following procedure to change modes:
1. Keep all doors closed, vehicle in PARK (P) and the ignition on throughout this procedure.
2. Press and hold the driver’s power door lock switch in the LOCK position through Step 4.
3. Press the button with the lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter. The automatic door locks will remain in the current mode.
4. Press the button with the lock symbol on the transmitter again. Each time the transmitter’s lock button is pressed, the mode will advance by one, going from 3 to 0 to 1, etc.
The door locks will cycle according to the mode entered. (Mode “0” has no feedback.)
5. Release the power door lock switch. The automatic door locks will remain in the most recent mode selected.
This procedure changes the mode for only the transmitter used to change this setting. The procedure will need to be repeated for the second transmitter.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you must program this feature through the
DIC. See “Driver Information Center Personalization
Programming” in the Index.
Delayed Locking
This feature lets the driver delay the actual locking of the vehicle. When the driver’s power door lock switch or the remote keyless entry lock button is pressed, with the key removed from the ignition and the driver’s door open, a chime will sound three times to signal that the delayed locking system is active. When all doors have been closed, the doors will lock automatically after five seconds. If any door is opened before this, the five second timer will reset itself once all the doors have been closed again.
Pressing the driver’s/passenger’s door lock switch or the remote keyless entry lock button again will override this feature.
Personalization Programming
The delayed locking feature can be turned on or off.
Vehicles are delivered with delayed locking off.
If your vehicle is not equipped with remote keyless entry, the delayed locking feature can be turned on or off by using the following procedure:
1. Keep all doors closed, vehicle in PARK (P) and the ignition on throughout this procedure.
2. Press and hold the driver’s power door lock switch in the LOCK position through Step 4.
3. Cycle the park lamp switch from off to on six times.
On the sixth cycle, the doors will unlock to confirm that the feature has been turned on. Your doors will remain locked if delayed locking is off.
4. To change modes, cycle the park lamp switch once more. A locking action will confirm the new mode.
5. Release the power door lock switch.
To turn the feature off, repeat the previous procedure.
If your vehicle is equipped with remote keyless entry, your vehicle can be programmed to each driver’s preference for each of the transmitters. Use the following procedure to turn the feature off using the corresponding transmitter:
1. Keep all doors closed, vehicle in PARK (P) and the ignition on throughout this procedure.
2. Press and hold the power door lock switch in the
LOCK position throughout this procedure. All the doors will lock.
3. Press the button with the unlock symbol on the transmitter. The lock delay is still on and all the doors will unlock.
4. Press the button with the unlock symbol on the transmitter again. Lock delay is now off and all the doors will lock.
5. Release the power door lock switch.
2-7
To turn this feature on, repeat the previous procedure.
This procedure changes the mode for only the transmitter used to change this setting. The procedure will need to be repeated for the second transmitter.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you must program this feature through the
DIC. See “Driver Information Center Personalization
Programming” in the Index.
Rear Door Security Lock
Your vehicle is equipped with rear door security locks that help prevent passengers from opening the rear doors of your vehicle from the inside.
To use one of these locks:
1. Move the lever all the way up to the
ENGAGED position.
2. Close the door.
3. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.
2-8
The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from inside when this feature is in use. If you want to open a rear door when the security lock is on:
1. Unlock the door.
2. Then open the door from the outside.
If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adults or older children who ride in the rear seat won’t be able to open the rear door from the inside. You should let adults and older children know how these security locks work, and how to cancel the locks.
To cancel the rear door lock:
1. Unlock the door and open the door from the outside.
2. Move the lever all the way down.
3. Do the same for the other rear door.
The rear door locks will now work normally.
Anti-Lockout Feature
The power door locks will not work if the key is in the ignition and any door is open. You can override this feature by holding the driver’s power door lock switch for more than three seconds.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your door and set the locks from the inside. Then get out and close the door. You may also use the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter after shutting the doors.
If your vehicle has a theft
“Universal Theft
deterrent system, see
Deterrent” in the Index.
Remote Keyless Entry (If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this feature, you can lock and unlock your doors or unlock your trunk from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.
Your remote keyless entry system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
D Check the distance. You may be too far from your vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy or snowy weather.
D Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try again.
D Check to determine if battery replacement or resynchronization is necessary. See the instructions that follow.
D If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer or a qualified technician for service.
2-9
Operation
The driver’s door will unlock and the exterior lamps may flash twice when the button with the unlock symbol is pressed.
The fuel door will also unlock when unlock is pressed, if you have the optional fuel door lock.
If the button with the unlock symbol is pressed again within five seconds, all doors will unlock. Pressing the unlock button will also illuminate the interior lamps.
See “Illuminated Entry” and “Security Feedback” in the Index.
All doors will lock, the exterior lamps may flash once and the horn may chirp when the button with the lock symbol is pressed. See “Security Feedback” in the
Index. Pressing the lock button may also turn off the interior lamps if illuminated.
The trunk will unlock when the trunk symbol is pressed when the ignition is in OFF. The trunk symbol will also work when the ignition is on, but only while in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Instant Alarm
When the button with the horn symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed, the horn will sound and the headlamps and taillamps will flash for up to
30 seconds. This can be turned off by pressing the instant alarm button again or by turning the ignition to
ON. If your vehicle is equipped with the Universal
Theft Deterrent feature, you may also turn off the alarm by unlocking the vehicle with a key. See “Universal
Theft Deterrent” in the Index.
2-10
Personalization Features
The following list of features that are available on your vehicle can be programmed to each driver’s preference for each of the remote keyless entry transmitters:
D Programmable Automatic Door Locks
D Security Feedback
D Delayed Locking
D Perimeter Lighting
D Seat and Mirror Recall
For more detailed information and programming instructions, refer to the Index for each individual feature listed above.
Security Feedback
This provides feedback to the driver when the vehicle receives a command from the remote keyless entry transmitter. The following modes may be selected:
D Mode 1: No feedback when locking or unlocking vehicle.
D Mode 2: Parking lamps and the daytime running lamps will flash twice when unlocking the vehicle and flash once when locking the vehicle.
D Mode 3: Horn chirps when all doors are unlocked
(second unlock button press) and when locking the vehicle.
D Mode 4: Parking lamps and the daytime running lamps will flash twice each time the button with the unlock symbol is pressed; the horn chirps when all doors are unlocked. Parking lamps and the exterior lamps flash once and the horn chirps when locking the vehicle.
Vehicles are delivered programmed in Mode 2. To change to another mode:
1. Keep all doors closed, vehicle in PARK (P) and the ignition on throughout this procedure.
2. Press and hold the driver’s power door lock switch in the LOCK position through Step 4.
3. Press the button with the trunk symbol on the transmitter.
The transmitter will remain in its current mode.
4. Press the button with the trunk symbol again. Each time the transmitter’s trunk button is pressed, the mode will advance by one, going from Mode 2 to 3 to 4, etc. and the horn will chirp as feedback.
5. Release the power door lock switch. The security feedback will remain in the most recent mode selected.
2-11
This procedure changes the mode for only the transmitter used to change this setting. The procedure will need to be repeated for the second transmitter.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you must program this feature through the
DIC. See “Driver Information Center Personalization
Programming” in the Index.
Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring any remaining transmitters with you when you go to your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can have only four transmitters matched to it.
See your dealer to match additional transmitters to your vehicle.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t work at the normal range in any location. If you have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works, it’s probably time to change the battery.
NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body transferred to these surfaces may damage the transmitter.
2-12
For battery replacement, use one Duracell
R type DL 2032, or a similar type.
battery,
To replace the battery:
1. Insert a coin into the notch near the key ring. Turn the coin counterclockwise to separate the two halves of the transmitter.
2. Once the transmitter is separated, use a pencil eraser to remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Remove and replace the battery. Replace it as the instructions inside the cover indicate.
4. Snap the transmitter back together tightly to be sure no moisture can enter.
5. Test the operation of the transmitter with your vehicle. If the transmitter does not work, resynchronize the transmitter. See
“Resychronization” following.
Resynchronization
Pressing the transmitter button numerous times
(approximately 250 times) out of the vehicle’s operating range may cause the transmitter not to work. Replacing the battery and pressing the transmitter buttons out of range will also cause the transmitter not to work. If only the instant alarm works, the transmitter needs to be resynchronized to the receiver. To resynchronize the remote keyless entry transmitter, press and hold both the button with the lock symbol and the button with the unlock symbol at the same time for about eight seconds.
You must be within range of the vehicle.
Once the transmitter has been resynchronized, the locks will cycle (the horn may chirp and the exterior lamps may flash depending on security feedback settings).
The system should now operate properly.
2-13
Trunk
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
If you must drive with the trunk lid open or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the trunk lid:
D Make sure all other windows are shut.
D Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed with the setting on OUTSIDE AIR or with RECIRC turned off. That will force outside air into your vehicle. See “Comfort Controls” in the Index.
D If you have air outlets on or under the instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
Trunk Lock Release
To unlock the trunk from the outside, insert the master key and turn it.
Remote Trunk Release (Option)
If you have this option, press the trunk release button located in the glove box to open the trunk lid.
The key does not have to be in the ignition for the remote trunk button to work. The transaxle must be in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). The system also works with the remote keyless entry system, if your vehicle has this feature.
2-14
Remote Trunk Release Lockout (Option)
To secure items in the trunk, lock the glove box with the master key and take your key and remote keyless entry transmitter with you. The gray valet key cannot open the trunk or the glovebox.
Trunk Security Override (Option)
Pressing the trunk symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter opens the trunk even if the glove box is locked.
Theft
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft deterrent features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you can help.
Key in the Ignition
If you leave your vehicle with the keys inside, it’s an easy target for joy riders or professional thieves - so don’t do it.
With the ignition off and the driver’s door open, you’ll hear a tone reminding you to remove your key from the ignition and take it with you. Always do this. Your ignition and transaxle will be locked. And remember to lock the doors.
Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your vehicle. Remember to keep your valuables out of sight.
Put them in a storage area, or take them with you.
Parking Lots
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching your vehicle, it’s best to lock it up and take your keys.
But what if you have to leave your ignition key?
D If possible, park in a busy, well lit area.
D Put your valuables in a storage area, like your trunk or glove box. Be sure to close and lock the storage area.
D Close all windows.
D Lock the glove box.
D Lock all doors except the driver’s.
D Give the valet key to the valet. Then take the master key with you.
2-15
Universal Theft
-
Deterrent (Option)
If your vehicle has this option, it has a theft deterrent alarm system. With this system, the SECURITY light will flash as you open the door (if your ignition is in OFF).
This light on the instrument panel cluster reminds you to activate the theft deterrent system when leaving your vehicle.
To activate the system:
1. Open the door.
2. Lock the door with the power door lock switch while the door is open, or use the remote keyless entry transmitter. The SECURITY light should come on and stay on.
3. Close all doors. The SECURITY light should go off after about 30 seconds and the system will then be armed.
If the SECURITY light comes on for one minute and then shuts off while the ignition is on, the security system has detected a problem. See your dealer for service.
Once the theft system is armed, the THEFT light on the
Twilight Sentinel
R
dimmer switch will flash to indicate the system is armed.
If a door is opened without the key or remote keyless entry transmitter, or if the door key cylinders are damaged, the alarm will go off. The exterior lamps will flash and the horn will sound for 30 seconds, then will go off in order to save battery power.
Remember, the theft deterrent system won’t activate if you lock the doors with a key or manual door lock. It activates only if you use a power door lock switch while the door is open, or the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Avoid setting off the alarm by accident.
Always unlock a door with a key, or use the remote keyless entry system transmitter. Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm.
If you set off the alarm by accident, unlock any door with your key. You can also turn off the alarm by pressing the button with the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter. The alarm won’t stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.
2-16
Testing the Alarm
1. From inside the vehicle, roll down the window.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the power door lock switch while the door is open, or with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for the
SECURITY light to go out.
4. Then, reach in through the window, unlock the door with the manual door lock and open the door.
This should set off the alarm.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, check to see if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown.
To replace the fuse, see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.
If the alarm does not sound, or the exterior lamps do not flash, see your dealer.
PASS
-
Key
R
III
Your vehicle is equipped with the PASS Key III
(Personalized Automotive
Security System) theft deterrent system.
PASS Key III is a passive theft deterrent system.
This means you don’t have to do anything different to arm or disarm the system. It works when you insert or remove the key from the ignition.
Your PASS Key III system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
2-17
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
PASS Key III uses a radio frequency transponder in the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
When the PASS Key III system senses that someone is using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s starter and fuel systems. The starter will not work and fuel will stop being delivered to the engine. Anyone using a trial and error method to start the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high number of electrical key codes.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not start and the SECURITY light comes on, the key may have a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you may also want to check the fuse (see “Fuses and
Circuit Breakers” in the Index). If the engine still does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs service.
If your vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service the
PASS Key III to have a new key made.
It is possible for the PASS Key III decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up to
10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. This procedure is for learning additional keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS Key III to have keys made and programmed to the system.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS Key III to get a new key blank that is a cut exactly as a current black colored driver’s key that operates the system. Do not used a gray colored valet key for this procedure.
2-18
To program the new key:
1. Insert the current driver’s key (black in color) in the ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not start, see your dealer for service.
2. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF, and remove the key.
3. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to RUN within 10 seconds of removing the previous key.
4. The SECURITY telltale light will turn off once the key has been programmed. It may not be apparent that the SECURITY light went on due to how quickly the key is programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the SECURITY light comes on and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine if you turn it off. Your PASS Key III system, however, is not working properly and must be serviced by your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the PASS Key
III system at this time.
If you lose or damage a PASS Key III key, see your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS Key III to have a new key made.
New Vehicle “Break
-
In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break in.” But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines:
D Don’t drive at any one speed - fast or slow - for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full throttle starts.
D Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time your new brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking in guideline every time you get new brake linings.
D Don’t tow a trailer during break in.
See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for more information.
2-19
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition, you can turn the switch to four different positions.
LOCK (A): This is the only position from which you can remove the key. This position locks your ignition and transaxle. It’s a theft deterrent feature.
NOTICE:
If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the steering wheel left and right while you turn the key hard. But turn the key only with your hand.
Using a tool to force it could break the key or the ignition switch. If none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
ACCESSORY (B): In this position you can operate your electrical power accessories such as power windows, power sunroof (option), audio system and windshield wipers.
RUN (C): This is the position the switch returns to after you start your engine and release the switch. Even when the engine is not running, you can use RUN to operate your electrical power accessories and to display some instrument panel cluster warning lights. This is the position for driving your vehicle.
2-20
START (D): This position starts the engine. When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will return to RUN for normal driving.
Even if the engine is not running, ACCESSORY and
RUN are positions that allow you to operate your electrical accessories.
Key Reminder Warning
If you leave your key in the ignition, in the LOCK position, you will hear a warning tone when you open the driver’s door.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
After you turn the ignition off and even remove the key, you will still have electrical power to such accessories as the radio, sunroof (if equipped) and power windows for up to 10 minutes. Power is turned off if you open a door.
Always leave your key in LOCK. If you leave your key in any position other than LOCK, your battery will discharge prematurely.
Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position - that’s a safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as your engine gets warm.
2-21
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter.
NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical parts or accessories, you could change the way the engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment, check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine might not perform properly.
If you ever have to have your vehicle towed, see the part of this manual that tells how to do it without damaging your vehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in the Index.
2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in
START for about three to five seconds at a time until your engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining your battery or damaging your starter.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
After waiting about 15 seconds, repeat the normal starting procedure.
2-22
Engine Coolant Heater (If Equipped)
In very cold weather, 0
_F ( 18
_C) or colder, the engine coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm up. Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The engine coolant heater cord is located on the passenger’s side of the vehicle, above the headlamp assembly.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110 volt AC outlet.
CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three prong
110 volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a heavy duty three prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that particular area.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
Your automatic transaxle may have a shift lever located on the console between the seats or on the steering column.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
2-23
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels.
It’s the best position to use when you start your engine because your vehicle can’t move easily.
CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock control system. You have to fully
apply your regular brakes before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever - push the shift lever all the way into PARK (P) and also release the shift lever button on floor shift console models as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever into the gear you wish (press the shift lever button before moving the shift lever on floor shift console models). See “Shifting Out of PARK (P)” in the Index.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
NOTICE:
Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle is moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
2-24
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t connect with the wheels. To restart when you’re already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
CAUTION:
Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.
NOTICE:
Damage to your transaxle caused by shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you need more power for passing, and you’re:
D Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
D Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).
Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3) instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
D When driving on hilly, winding roads,
D when towing a trailer, so there is less shifting between gears, or
D when going down a steep hill.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed as you go down steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to use your brakes off and on.
2-25
NOTICE:
Don’t drive in SECOND (2) for more than
5 miles (8 km), or at speeds over 55 mph
(90 km/h), or you can damage your transaxle.
Use AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) or
THIRD (3) as much as possible.
Don’t shift into SECOND (2) unless you are going slower than 65 mph (105 km/h), or you can damage your engine.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
If the selector lever is put in FIRST (1), the transaxle won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
NOTICE:
If your front wheels will not turn, don’t try to drive. This might happen if you were stuck in very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object. You could damage your transaxle.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold your vehicle there with only the accelerator pedal. This could overheat and damage the transaxle. Use your brakes or shift into PARK (P) to hold your vehicle in position on a hill.
Parking Brake
Your vehicle has a PUSH
TO RELEASE parking brake. To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot. Push down the parking brake pedal with your left foot.
2-26
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on and a single chime will be heard.
If you start to drive with the parking brake set, a chime will sound after the vehicle has traveled approximately
40 feet (12 m).
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down with your right foot and push the parking brake pedal with your left foot. This will release the parking brake pedal. When you lift your left foot, the parking brake pedal will follow it to the release position.
If you try to drive with the parking brake on, the brake light stays on and a chime sounds until you release the parking brake.
Shifting Into PARK (P)
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. If you’re pulling a trailer, see “Towing a
Trailer” in the Index.
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to replace them, and you could also damage other parts of your vehicle.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index. That section shows what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.
2-27
Steering Column Shift Lever
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:
D Pull the lever toward you.
D Move the lever up as far as it will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-28
Console Shift Lever (Option)
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:
D Hold in the button on the lever.
D Push the lever all the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with the engine running. Your vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle with the engine running unless you have to.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you (or, if you have the console shift lever, without first pushing the button). If you can, it means that the shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
2-29
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” in the Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock control system. You have to fully apply your regular brake before you can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. See “Automatic Transaxle” in the Index.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever - push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever into the gear you want (if you have the console shift lever, press the button first). If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift out of
PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the drive gear you want.
5. Take your vehicle to an authorized service center as soon as you can.
2-30
Parking Over Things That Burn
CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things that can burn.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you can’t see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
D Your exhaust system sounds strange or different.
D Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
D Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
D Your vehicle was damaged when driving over high points on the road or over road debris.
D Repairs weren’t done correctly.
D Your vehicle or exhaust system had been modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your vehicle:
D Drive it only with all the windows down to blow out any CO; and
D Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-31
Running Your Engine While
You’re Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know.
CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control system off could allow dangerous exhaust into your vehicle (see the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling in a closed in place can let deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if the fan switch is at the highest setting. One place this can happen is a garage. Exhaust - with
CO - can come in easily. NEVER park in a garage with the engine running.
Another closed in place can be a blizzard.
(See “Blizzard” in the Index.)
CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you’ve left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when you’re on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling a trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.
2-32
Windows
Power Windows
Switches on the driver’s door panel operate each of the windows when the ignition is on or when Retained
Accessory Power is active. In addition, each passenger door has a switch for its own window.
Express
-
Down Windows
When the driver’s and front passenger’s window switch is pushed all the way rearward, the window will lower completely. The window can be opened in smaller amounts by pressing the switch rearward slightly, to the first stop.
To stop the window while it is lowering in the express mode, press the switch again, then release. To raise the window, hold the switch forward.
Window Lock
Press the LOCK button on the driver’s door armrest to disable all passenger window switches. (If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC), you can also set the control to only lock out the rear window switches.
See “Driver Information Center” in the Index.)
The driver’s window switches will still be operable.
Press the LOCK button again to allow passengers to use their window switches.
An indicator light in the button will glow when the window lock function is on.
Horn
Press on the center area of the steering wheel to sound the horn.
2-33
Tilt Wheel
A tilt steering wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
You can also raise it to the highest level to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lever toward you. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable level, then release the lever to lock the wheel into place.
The lever on the left side of the steering column includes your:
D Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals
D Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer
D Flash To Pass Feature
D Cruise Control
D Manual Exterior Lamps Control
2-34
Turn and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument panel cluster will flash in the direction of the turn or lane change.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turn signal. To turn off the chime, move the turn signal lever to the off position.
Headlamps
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself when you release it.
If the arrows flash very fast as you signal a turn or a lane change, a signal bulb may be burned out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal a turn, check the fuse. See “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Index.
The headlamp control is located on the left steering column lever.
2-35
Turn the control to this symbol to turn on the:
D Parking Lamps
D Sidemarker Lamps
D Taillamps
D License Plate Lamps
D Instrument Panel Lights
Turn the headlamp control to this symbol to turn on the:
D Headlamps
D Parking Lamps
D Sidemarker Lamps
D Taillamps
D License Plate Lamps
D Instrument Panel Lights
Turn the headlamp switch back to the off position to turn all of the lamps and lights off.
Wiper
-
Activated Headlamps
This feature turns on the low beam headlamps, instrument panel cluster backlighting and taillamps when the Twilight
Sentinel
R
is in day mode and after the windshield wipers have been in use for approximately six seconds.
To operate the wiper activated headlamps, the Twilight
Sentinel must be on. If the wiper activated headlamps are on and the ignition switch is turned to RUN, the wiper activated headlamps will continue. When you turn the key to LOCK, the wiper activated headlamps will immediately turn off.
The wiper activated headlamps will also turn off if you turn off the Twilight Sentinel or the windshield wipers.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to high beam, push the lever forward. To change from high beam to low beam, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then release it.
When the high beams are on, this light on the instrument panel cluster will also be on.
2-36
Lamps On Reminder
If you open the driver’s door while leaving the headlamps or parking lamps on and the key is in LOCK, you will hear a warning chime.
Flash-To-Pass Feature
This feature lets you use your high beam headlamps to signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are off.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you.
If your headlamps are off or on low beam, your high beam headlamps will turn on. They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you and the high beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster will come on.
Release the lever to turn the high beam headlamps off.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wipers are controlled by the lever on the right of your steering column.
If your windshield wipers are on for more than six seconds while you are driving, the low beam headlamps, instrument panel cluster backlighting and the taillamps will turn on. For more information see
“Wiper Activated Headlamps” in the Index.
MIST: For a single wiping cycle, push the lever down to the MIST position and let go. The wipers will stop after one cycle. If you want more cycles, hold the lever down.
LO or HI: Push the lever up to LO for steady wiping at a slow speed. Push the lever up to HI for steady wiping at a high speed.
INT: Push the lever up to the INT position and turn the
INT ADJ band to adjust the delay time. The further you turn the band, the shorter the delay between wiping cycles.
OFF: Lower the lever to its original position to turn the wipers OFF.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor. A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools. Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Keep in mind that damaged wiper blades may prevent you from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If your blades do become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
2-37
Windshield Washer
At the end of the wiper lever, there’s a button. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push the button until you have enough fluid to clean the windshield. The wipers will clear the window and either stop or return to your preset speed.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can really help on long trips.
CAUTION:
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision.
A WASHER FLUID warning light will indicate if the fluid level in the windshield washer reservoir is low. See
“Low Washer Fluid Warning Light” in the Index.
Cruise control does not work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control shuts off.
2-38
CAUTION:
D Cruise control can be dangerous where you can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So, don’t use your cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic.
D Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause needless wheel spinning, and you could lose control.
Don’t use cruise control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the optional traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage.
(See “Traction Control System” in the Index.)
When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn the cruise control back on.
Setting Cruise Control
CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control switch on when you’re not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into cruise when you don’t want to. You could be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control.
1. Push the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Push the set button.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
2-39
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts off the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can move the cruise lever up to R/A
(resume/accelerate) briefly.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and stay there. Remember that if you hold the lever at R/A, the vehicle will keep going faster until you release the switch or apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t hold the lever at R/A.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
D Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Press the SET button and then release it as well as the accelerator pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
D Push the cruise lever up to R/A. Hold it there until you get up to the speed you want, and then release it.
To increase your speed in very small amounts, move the switch to R/A briefly and then release it.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
2-40
The accelerate feature will only work after you have set the cruise control speed by pushing the SET button.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using cruise control:
D Press the SET button.
D To slow down in very small amounts, press and release the SET button briefly. Each time you do this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may have to step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to turn off the cruise control:
D Step lightly on the brake pedal,
D move the cruise switch to OFF, or
D push the cruise lever toward the driver.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Exterior Lamps
Headlamps
See “Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever” in the Index.
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short periods after dawn and before sunset.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel monitors the exterior light level for the operation of DRL and
Twilight Sentinel
R
, so be sure it isn’t covered. The DRL system will make your high beam headlamps come on at a reduced brightness when:
D The ignition is on,
D the headlamp switch is off, and
D the transaxle is not in PARK (P).
When the DRL are on, only your high beam headlamps will be on at reduced intensity. The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be on. Your instrument panel won’t be lit either.
When it’s dark enough outside, your regular intensity headlamps will come on at full brightness and the DRL lighting will turn off. The park lamps that normally come on with your headlamps will also come on.
When it’s bright enough outside, the regular intensity headlamps and park lamps will turn back off, and the reduced brightness DRL lighting will turn back on.
To idle your vehicle during the day with the DRL off, shift the transaxle into PARK (P). The DRL will stay off until you shift out of PARK (P).
At night, you can turn off all exterior lamps when you are in PARK (P) by turning the Twilight Sentinel knob all the way to OFF.
2-41
If the knob was already in OFF, it must be cycled to ON and back to OFF. Turn the knob clockwise to turn the exterior lighting back on. The lamps will come back on automatically when you put the transaxle in gear.
The Twilight Sentinel will keep your headlamps on for up to three minutes, to light your way when you leave your vehicle. The timer will start when you move your ignition key from the RUN position.
See “Twilight Sentinel
R
” in the Index to learn how to operate this feature.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular headlamp system when you need it.
Fog Lamps
An indicator light in the button will glow when the fog lamps are on. Your parking lamps will also come on automatically while the fog lamps are active.
If your fog lamps are on when you use your high beams or flash to pass feature, the fog lamps will be disabled while the feature is being used.
Twilight Sentinel
R
The fog lamps button is located below the twilight knob to the left of the steering wheel.
Twilight Sentinel
R
will keep your headlamps on for up to three minutes, to light your way when you leave your vehicle.
To operate Twilight Sentinel, turn the DELAY knob located to the left of the steering column on the instrument panel fully clockwise for the three minute delay. Turn it counterclockwise to reduce the delay.
Turn the knob to OFF to turn Twilight Sentinel off.
2-42
At night, you can turn off all exterior lamps when you are in PARK (P) by turning the Twilight Sentinel knob all the way to OFF. If the knob was already in OFF, it must be cycled to ON then back to OFF, to turn the exterior lighting off. The lamps will come back on when you turn the knob clockwise.
If the Twilight Sentinel lighting is active, it can be disabled by turning on the manual parking lamps. This lighting will be disabled until the key is turned from
RUN or until the manual park lamps are turned OFF.
Also, it’s possible that your headlamps may go out if you drive from a dark area into a bright area like a lighted parking lot. If this happens, turn on your headlamps with the regular headlamp switch.
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
If the manual lamp control has been left on, the exterior lamps will turn off approximately 10 minutes after the ignition is turned to OFF and any door has been opened.
This protects against draining the battery in case you have accidentally left the headlamps or parking lamps on. If you need to leave the lamps on for more than
10 minutes, use the manual control to turn the lamps back on after turning the ignition to OFF and opening any door. To delay the lamps from turning off, see “Twilight Sentinel
R
” in the Index.
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel/Brightness Control
When it is dark outside, you can brighten or dim your instrument panel cluster lights by turning the DIM knob in the light control. Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the instrument panel cluster lights and displays. Turn the knob clockwise all the way to turn on the interior courtesy lamps.
Turn the knob counterclockwise to dim the instrument panel cluster lights and displays and to turn off the courtesy lamps.
Courtesy Lamps
If it is dark enough outside, when any door is opened, several lamps will come on. They make it easier for you to enter and leave the vehicle. Turn the dimmer knob all the way clockwise to turn the interior courtesy lamps on.
Illuminated Entry
If it is dark enough outside and you press the button with the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter, the interior courtesy lamps will come on and stay on for approximately 40 seconds. The lamps will turn off immediately by pressing the button with the lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter, turning the ignition key to RUN or activating the power door locks.
If a door is left ajar, your interior lamps will turn off after 10 minutes to save your battery.
2-43
Delayed Entry Lighting
When you open the door to enter your vehicle, the interior lamps will come on if it is dark outside. When you close the door with the ignition off, the interior lamps will stay on for 25 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. Please note that locking the doors with the power door lock switch, or with the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter, will override the delayed entry lighting and the lamps will turn off immediately.
Theater Dimming
This feature allows for a three to five second fade out of the courtesy lamps instead of immediate turn off after you remove the key from the ignition.
Delayed Exit Lighting
This feature will turn on the interior lamps for
25 seconds after you remove the key from the ignition while the doors are closed and it is night. This will give you time to find the door handle or lock switches as you exit the vehicle.
This lighting will only be deactivated if the key is reinserted into the ignition switch or the power door locks are activated.
Parade Dimming
To activate the instrument panel backlighting during the day, turn the headlamp switch to the parking lamp or headlamp position. Dimming of the instrument panel display is not possible during daylight hours. The instrument panel display can only be adjusted when the parking lamps or headlamps are on and it is dark outside.
Perimeter Lighting
When the button with the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed, the DRL headlamps, parking lamps and back up lamps will turn on if it is dark enough outside.
Personalization Programming
This feature can be programmed in the on or off mode for each transmitter. Vehicles are delivered with this feature on.
To turn the feature off:
1. Keep all doors closed, vehicle in PARK (P) and the ignition on throughout this procedure.
2. Press and hold LOCK on the power door lock switch throughout this procedure. All the doors will lock.
3. Press the instant alarm on the transmitter. Perimeter lighting remains on at this time and the horn will chirp twice.
2-44
4. Press the instant alarm on the transmitter again. Perimeter lighting is disabled and the horn will chirp once.
5. Release the door lock switch. The perimeter lighting feature is now off.
To turn the feature on:
1. Keep all doors closed, vehicle in PARK (P) and the ignition on throughout this procedure.
2. Press and hold LOCK on the power door lock switch throughout this procedure. All the doors will lock.
3. Press the instant alarm on the transmitter. Perimeter lighting remains off at this time and the horn will chirp once.
4. Press the instant alarm on the transmitter again.
Perimeter lighting is now enabled and the horn will chirp twice.
5. Release the door lock switch. The perimeter lighting feature is now on.
This procedure only changes the mode for the transmitter used to change this setting. The procedure will need to be repeated for the second transmitter.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information
Center (DIC), you must program this feature through the
DIC. See “Driver Information Center Personalization
Programming” in the Index.
Front Reading Lamps
The front reading lamps will come on as courtesy lamps when you open any of the doors while it is dark outside.
They will also come on as part of the interior lighting features listed previously.
To turn on a reading lamp when the doors are closed, press either switch. Press it again to turn the lamp off.
To avoid draining your vehicle’s battery, be sure to turn off the reading lamps when leaving your vehicle. See
“Inadvertent Power Battery Saver” later in this section for more information.
2-45
Rear Reading Lamps
The rear reading lamps will come on as courtesy lamps when you open any of the doors while it is dark outside.
They will also come on as part of the interior lighting features listed previously.
To turn on a reading lamp when the doors are closed, press either switch. Press it again to turn the lamp off.
Inadvertent Power Battery Saver
This feature is designed to protect your vehicle’s battery against drainage from the interior lamps, trunk lamp, glove box lamp or cigarette lighters. When the ignition is turned off, the power to these features will automatically turn off after 10 minutes. Power will be restored for an additional 10 minutes if any door is opened, the trunk is opened or the courtesy lamp switch is turned on. To restore power back to the cigarette lighters the ignition must be turned back to RUN.
Battery Load Management
The battery load management feature is designed to monitor the vehicle’s electrical load and determine when the battery is in a heavy discharge condition. During times of high electrical loading, the engine may idle at higher revolutions per minute (rpm) than normal to make sure the battery charges. High electrical loads may occur when several of the following are on: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps, rear window defogger, high blower fan, heated seats and engine cooling fans.
2-46
If your vehicle’s battery remains in a heavy discharge condition for a long period of time, the blower fan, rear defogger, heated seats and heated mirrors will be disabled and the DIC will display BATTERY SAVER
ACTIVE. This can happen either under long periods of idling or low speed driving with high electrical loading, or in the event of a charging system fault.
Monitor the battery voltage when in the BATTERY
SAVER ACTIVE mode.
D If the voltmeter remains in the red area (below
11 volts) when driving then have the charging system serviced immediately.
D If the voltage increases above 12 volts then the battery needs to be recharged. Try driving on the highway with as few electrical accessories on as possible.
Mirrors
Inside Day/Night Manual Rearview Mirror
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving position, adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behind your vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to move it up or down and side to side. The day/night adjustment allows you to adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the lamps behind you. Push the tab away from you for daytime use; pull it toward you for night use.
Electrochromic Day/Night Rearview Mirror
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have an automatic electrochromic day/night rearview mirror.
When this feature is turned on, the mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from headlamps behind you.
A photocell on the mirror senses when it is becoming dark outside. Another photocell built into the mirror face senses when headlamps are behind you.
At night, when the glare is too high, the mirror will gradually darken to reduce glare (this change may take a few seconds). The mirror will return to its clear daytime state when the glare is reduced.
2-47
Mirror Operation
To turn on the automatic dimming feature, press AUTO.
To turn off automatic dimming, press OFF. The amber indicator light will be illuminated when this feature is active.
Time Delay
The automatic mirror has a time delay feature which prevents unnecessary switching from the night position back to the day position. This delay prevents rapid changing of the mirror as you drive under lights and through traffic.
Cleaning the Photocells
Use a cotton swab and glass cleaner to clean the photocells when necessary.
Power Remote Control Mirrors
Your vehicle has a remote mirror control located on the driver’s door armrest.
Move the L/R rocker switch located beneath the mirror control to choose the left or right mirror.
2-48
To adjust a mirror, move the arrow control in the direction you want that mirror to go. Leave the L/R switch in the center position to disable mirror movement by the arrow control. Adjust each outside mirror so that your vehicle is barely visible in the mirror.
If your vehicle is equipped with the memory seat and mirrors feature, these mirror positions, along with the driver’s seat position can be stored in memory.
See “Memory Seat and Mirrors” in the Index.
Parallel Park Assist Mirror (If Equipped)
If you have the memory seat and mirrors feature, the passenger’s outside rearview mirror also includes a tilt down feature that operates when the shift lever is in
REVERSE (R). When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (R), the passenger’s mirror will return to its original position after a five second delay. This delay prevents movement of the mirror if multiple gear transitions (REVERSE (R) to DRIVE (D) to
REVERSE (R)) occur during a parallel parking maneuver. This feature can be programmed on or off through the DIC personalization programming menu.
See “DIC Personalization Programming” in the Index for programming instructions. Vehicles are delivered with this feature off.
Convex Outside Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from the driver’s seat.
CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your inside mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.
Heated Outside Mirror
When you operate the rear window defogger, a defogger also warms the heated driver’s and passenger’s outside mirrors to help clear them of ice and snow.
2-49
Storage Compartments
Glove Box
Use the master key to lock and unlock the glove box.
To open, lift the latch release on the left side of the glove box door.
The VALET key will not work in the glove box door lock.
Front Storage Armrest
Press the buttons on either side of the armrest to open the storage area for cassette tapes, gloves, etc.
Center Console (Option)
Press the button at the front edge of the armrest to open the storage area for cassette tapes, gloves, etc.
Rear Armrest
Your vehicle has a rear armrest with cupholders and a pass through feature.
Rear Storage Compartment (Option)
Your vehicle may have a rear storage armrest with cupholders and a pass through feature.
Lift the front of the cover on the armrest to reveal the storage space.
Pull down the interior door to access the trunk.
Convenience Net (Option)
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You’ll see it just inside the back wall of the trunk.
Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net. It can help keep them from falling over during sharp turns or quick starts and stops. For heavier loads, store them in the trunk as far forward as you can.
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when you’re not using it.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Push down on the cover to reveal the front ashtray.
To clean the ashtray, lift it out by pulling on the snuffer.
On models without a console, there’s an ashtray under the instrument panel. To clean the ashtray, lift it out by pulling up on the tabs on either side. It snaps back into place.
2-50
To open a rear ashtray, lift the cover.
NOTICE:
Don’t put papers and other things that burn into your ashtrays. If you do, cigarettes or other smoking materials could set them on fire, causing damage.
The cigarette lighter is located next to the storage tray.
To use a lighter, just push the center in all the way and let it go. When it is ready, the center will pop back out by itself. Pull out the entire unit to use it.
NOTICE:
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with your hand while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to back away from the heating element when it’s ready. That can make it overheat, damaging the lighter and the heating element.
The cigarette lighter will only operate when the ignition key is in the RUN position and for 10 minutes after turning the ignition OFF. If you would like the lighter to operate regardless of ignition position, and for unlimited periods of time, see “Engine Compartment Bussed
Electrical Center” in the Index or see your dealer.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.
You can also remove them from the center mount and swing them to the side, while the auxiliary sunshade remains to block glare from the front.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Open the cover to expose the vanity mirror.
If your vehicle has the optional lighted vanity mirrors, the lamps come on when you open the cover.
2-51
Air Inflator System (Option)
CAUTION:
Inflating something too much can make it explode, and you or others could be injured. Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and inflate any object only to its recommended pressure.
Some vehicles have an air inflator for use in maintaining proper air pressure for the tires. The air inflator is located in the trunk. The air inflator will work only with the ignition on.
Pressing the AIR button will activate the inflator for ten minutes.
The air inflator comes with a kit that includes a 20 foot
(6.1 m) hose and an air pressure gage, as well as instructions and special adapters for inflating things like an air mattress or a basketball.
Accessory Power Outlet
The accessory power outlet (12 volt) is located inside the overhead console (if equipped) and at the rear of the front console (if equipped). If your vehicle is equipped with an overhead console, access the accessory power outlet by sliding the access door to the side. If your vehicle is equipped with a floor console, the power outlet is at the rear of the floor console. Remove the protective cap which covers the outlet.
The outlet can be used to plug in electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone, CB radio, etc. Follow the proper installation instructions that are included with any electrical equipment you install.
2-52
The accessory power outlet will only operate when the ignition key is in the RUN position and for 10 minutes after turning the ignition OFF. If you would like the accessory power outlet to operate regardless of ignition position, and for unlimited periods of time, see “Engine
Compartment Bussed Electrical Center” in the Index or see your dealer.
Leaving an accessory on for a long period of time, or a fuse in the wrong place, can drain the vehicle’s battery.
NOTICE:
When using the accessory power outlet, the maximum load of any electrical equipment should not exceed 15 amps.
OnStar
R
System (If Equipped)
Onstar is a vehicle communications service. The following services are available through a subscription with OnStar and are available 24 hours a day:
Emergency Services
D Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment
D Theft Notification and Stolen Vehicle Tracking
D Roadside Assistance with Location
D Remote Diagnostics
D OnStar MED NET
D Accident Assist
Convenience Services
D Remote Door Unlock
D Route Support
D Concierge Services
D Ride Assist
A complete user’s guide is provided with the OnStar
System. For more information contact OnStar at 1 888 ONSTAR7.
2-53
Express Sunroof (Option)
If your vehicle is equipped with this option, the switch is located between the sun visors.
The sunroof switch can be operated in four directions to control sunroof movement. The switch will work only when the ignition is on or when the ignition is off and the Retained Accessory Power is active.
The sunroof has both manual and express features for opening the glass panel and sunshade.
Press and hold the switch rearward to the first position to open the glass panel and sunshade. The sunshade can also be opened by hand. To close the glass panel, press and hold the switch forward. As the glass panel closes, it will open slightly toward the vent position to provide a better seal. The sunshade can only be closed by hand.
Press and release the switch rearward to the second position to express open the glass panel. It will stop in a partially open position. The glass panel may be fully opened by pressing the switch rearward again. When the glass panel is express opening, pressing the switch in any direction will stop it. Please note that if you press and hold the switch in the express open position for more than one and a half seconds, the express open operation will be overridden and the sunroof will operate manually.
To vent open the glass panel, press and hold the switch upward. The sunshade must be opened by hand.
To close the glass panel, pull and hold the switch downward.
2-54
HomeLink
R
Transmitter
(If Equipped)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
Programming the HomeLink
R
Transmitter
Do not use the HomeLink Transmitter with any garage door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse” safety feature. This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door you are programming.
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to program up to three channels:
1. If you have previously programmed a transmitter channel, proceed to Step 2. Otherwise, hold down the two outside buttons on the HomeLink
Transmitter until the indicator light begins to flash rapidly (after 20 seconds). Then release the buttons.
This procedure initializes the memory and erases any previous settings for all three channels.
2. Decide which one of the three channels you want to program. Hold the end of the hand held transmitter about 2 to 5 inches (5 to 13 cm) away from the surface of the HomeLink Transmitter so that you can still see the indicator light.
2-55
3. Using both hands, press the hand held transmitter button and the desired button on the HomeLink
Transmitter. Continue to press both buttons through Step 4.
4. Hold down both buttons until you see the indicator light on the HomeLink Transmitter flash slowly and then rapidly. The rapid flashing indicates that the
HomeLink Transmitter has been programmed.
Release both buttons once the indicator light starts to flash rapidly.
If you have trouble programming the HomeLink
Transmitter, make sure that you have followed the directions exactly as described. The HomeLink
Transmitter may not work with older garage door openers that do not meet current Federal Consumer
Safety Standards. If you cannot program the transmitter after repeated attempts, refer to “Rolling Code
Programming” later in this section or contact the HomeLink Transmitter manufacturer at 1 800 355 3515.
Be sure to keep the original hand held transmitter in case you need to erase and reprogram the
HomeLink Transmitter.
Note to Canadian Owners: During programming, the hand held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting after one or two seconds. In this case, you should press and re press the button on the hand held transmitter every two seconds without ever releasing the button on the HomeLink Transmitter. Release both buttons when the indicator light on the HomeLink
Transmitter begins to flash rapidly.
Operating the HomeLink
R
Transmitter
Press and release the appropriate button on the
HomeLink Transmitter. The indicator light comes on while the signal is being transmitted.
If the hand held transmitter appears to program the
HomeLink Transmitter but does not open your garage door, and if the garage door opener was manufactured after 1996, the garage door opener may have a “rolling code” system. A rolling code system changes the code of the garage door opener every time you open or close the garage door.
To determine if you have this system, press the button on the HomeLink Transmitter that you have programmed already. If the indicator light on the HomeLink
Transmitter flashes rapidly for two seconds and then turns solid, the garage door opener has a rolling code system. In a rolling code system, the garage door motor head unit must be trained to the HomeLink Transmitter.
2-56
“Rolling Code” Programming (If Equipped)
If you have not previously programmed the hand held transmitter to the HomeLink Transmitter, see “Programming the HomeLink
R
Transmitter” listed previously. If you have completed this programming already, you now need to train the garage door opener motor head unit to recognize the
HomeLink Transmitter. Refer to your garage door opener owner’s manual for the proper transmitter training procedure for your garage door opener brand.
1. Find the training button on the garage door opener motor head unit. The exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand. If you have difficulty finding the training button, refer to your garage door opener owner’s manual.
2. Press the training button on the garage door opener motor head unit.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds to start Step 3.
3. Return to the HomeLink Transmitter in your vehicle and firmly press and release the HomeLink
Transmitter button you have already programmed for two to three seconds. Press and release the button again (you may need to do this step up to three times) to make sure that the HomeLink Transmitter has been trained to the garage door opener motor head unit. Check that the training was successful.
The garage door opener should now recognize the
HomeLink Transmitter. You may either use the
HomeLink Transmitter or the hand held transmitter to open the garage door.
If after following these instructions, you still have problems training the garage door opener, contact the HomeLink Transmitter manufacturer at 1 800 355 3515.
Erasing Channels
To erase all three programmed channels, hold down the two outside buttons until the indicator light begins to flash (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons.
Accessories
Accessories for the HomeLink
R
Transmitter are available from the manufacturer of the unit.
If you would like additional information, please call 1 800 355 3515.
2-57
The Instrument Panel
-
Your Information System
2-58
A. Air Outlets
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
C. Audio System Steering Wheel Controls
D. Windshield Wiper Lever
E. Steering Column Shift Lever
F. Driver Information Center (DIC) Controls
G. Audio System
H. Hazard Warning Flashers Control
I. Twilight Sentinel
R
and Fog Lamp Controls
J. Ignition Switch
K. Comfort Control System
L. Glove Box
2-59
Instrument Panel Clusters
The instrument panel clusters are designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using, and many other things you’ll need to drive safely and economically.
Your vehicle is equipped with one of these instrument panel clusters, which includes indicator warning lights and gages that are explained on the following pages.
2-60
Standard Cluster (United States version shown, Canada similar)
Cluster with DIC (United States version shown, Canada similar)
2-61
2-62
Cluster with DIC and Boost Gage (United States version shown, Canada similar)
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers
(used in Canada).
The speedometer shows a top speed of 140 mph
(220 km/h). This is not intended to be the vehicle’s top speed.
Your vehicle is equipped with a tamper resistant odometer. If you see ERROR displayed, you’ll know that someone has probably tried to turn it back.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must be. But if it can’t, then it’s set at zero and a label must be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading when the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far you have driven since you last reset it.
Tachometer
To set it to zero, press the trip reset button next to the instrument panel cluster on the right side.
The tachometer shows your engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not run your engine at speeds in the red area.
2-63
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to your warning lights and gages could also save you or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will see in the details on the next few pages, some warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages and warning lights work together to let you know when there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows there may be a problem, check the section that tells you what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly - and even dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle may also have a Driver Information Center that works along with the warning lights and gages.
See “Driver Information Center” in the Index.
The volume of your vehicle’s warning chimes can be adjusted. For more information see “Chime Level
Adjustment” in the Index.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will come on for about eight seconds to remind people to fasten their safety belts.
The safety belt light will also come on and either stay on for about 20 seconds, then flash for about
55 seconds, or stay on for about 65 seconds.
2-64
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, the light will come on briefly, but the chime will not sound.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument panel, which shows AIR BAG. The system checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the air bag sensors, the air bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the air bag system, see “Air
Bag” in the Index.
This light will come on when you start your vehicle, and it will flash for a few seconds. Then the light should go out. This means the system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle serviced right away.
CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle, it means the air bag system may not be working properly. The air bags in your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle serviced right away if the air bag readiness light stays on after you start your vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
On vehicles with the optional DIC, a SERVICE AIR
BAG message will be displayed when there is a problem with the air bag system. See “DIC Warnings and
Messages” in the Index for more information.
2-65
Battery Warning Light (If Equipped)
This light will come on briefly when you start the vehicle, as a check to show you it is working; then it should go out.
Voltmeter (If Equipped)
You have a voltmeter unless you have the supercharged engine.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you may have a problem with the electrical charging system.
It could indicate that you have a generator problem or another electrical system problem. Have it checked right away. Driving while this light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio and comfort control system.
Some instrument panel clusters with a voltmeter gage do not have a battery warning light. They have a CHECK
GAGES warning to indicate a problem.
On vehicles with the optional DIC, a CHECK CHARGE
SYSTEM message will be displayed and a warning chime will sound. See “DIC Warnings and Messages” in the Index for more information.
When the ignition is running, the gage shows the condition of the charging system. Readings between the red warning zones indicate the normal operating range.
Readings in the red warning zones indicate a possible problem in the electrical system.
On vehicles with the systems monitor, the CHECK
GAGES light will also come on, and a warning chime will sound if there is a problem in the electrical system.
Have your vehicle serviced immediately.
On vehicles with the optional DIC, a CHECK CHARGE
SYSTEM message will be displayed and a warning chime will sound if there is a problem in the electrical system. Have your vehicle serviced immediately. See “DIC Warnings and
Messages” in the Index for more information.
2-66
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to an accident. If the light is still on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.
United States Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.)
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will also come on when you set your parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking brake doesn’t release fully. If you try to drive off with the parking brake set, a chime will also come on until you release the parking brake. If the light stays on after your parking brake is fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
If you have the optional Driver Information Center, a
PARK BRAKE SET message will be displayed while the park brake is set.
2-67
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
United States Canada
With the anti lock brake system, the light(s) will come on when you turn the key to RUN and may stay on for five seconds. That’s normal.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. Or, if the light comes on when you’re driving, stop as soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again while you’re driving, your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have anti lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also on, you don’t have anti lock brakes and there’s a problem with your regular brakes. See “Brake System
Warning Light” earlier in this section.
The anti lock brake system warning light should come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Traction Control System Warning
Light (Option)
This warning light should come on briefly as you start the engine.
If the warning light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
If it stays on, or comes on when you’re driving, there may be a problem with your traction control system and your vehicle may need service. When this warning light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
2-68
The traction control system warning light may come on for the following reasons:
D If you turn the system off by pressing the
TRACTION CONTROL button located on the center console, the warning light will come on and stay on. To turn the system back on, press the button again. The warning light should go off.
(See “Traction Control System” in the Index for more information.)
D If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically related to traction control, the traction control system will turn off and the warning light will come on.
If your brakes begin to overheat, the traction control system will turn off and the warning light will come on until your brakes cool down.
D If the traction control system is affected by an engine related problem, the system will turn off and the warning light will come on.
If the traction control system warning light comes on and stays on for an extended period of time when the system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
Low Traction Active (LOW TRAC) Light
Your LOW TRAC (Low
Traction Active) light may come on for one of the following reasons:
D An advanced computer
Stabilitrak
controlled system called
R
(if equipped) has come on to help your vehicle continue to go in the direction in which you’re steering. This stability enhancement system activates when the computer senses that your vehicle is just starting to spin, as it might if you hit a patch of ice or other slippery spot on the road. When the system is on, you may hear a noise or feel a vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal.
In these situations when the LOW TRAC light is on and the system is engaged, you should continue to steer in the direction you want to go. The system is designed to help you in bad weather or other difficult driving situations by making the most of whatever road conditions will permit.
2-69
D The optional Traction Control System is active and is limiting wheel spin. You may feel the system working, but this is normal. Slippery road conditions may exist, so adjust your driving accordingly.
If the LOW TRAC light comes on, slippery road conditions may exist, so you should consider slowing down and adjusting your driving accordingly.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
To prevent engine overheating, the air conditioning compressor will turn off automatically just prior to the gage pointer entering the red area. As the engine cools down, the air conditioning compressor will automatically turn back on. On vehicles equipped with the DIC, the message ENGINE HOT... A/C DISABLED will appear in the DIC display and a warning chime will sound.
If the gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine is too hot. On vehicles equipped with the systems monitor, the CHECK GAGES light will come on and a warning chime will sound.
On vehicles with the optional DIC, a CHECK GAGES
TEMPERATURE message will be displayed and a warning chime will sound. See “DIC Warnings and
Messages” in the Index for more information.
The section “Problems on the Road,” in this manual explains what to do if your engine overheats.
See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
United States Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
2-70
Tire Pressure Light (If Equipped)
The check tire pressure system can alert you to a large change in the pressure of one tire.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine Soon Light)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission control systems.
After the system has been properly calibrated, the
TIRE PRESS light will come on if a pressure difference
(low pressure) is detected in one tire.
The light will stay on until you turn off the ignition or reset (calibrate) the system. See “Check Tire Pressure
System” in the Index.
The TIRE PRESS light also comes on briefly when you turn your ignition key to START. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be there to tell you if the pressure in a tire is low.
If the anti lock brake system warning light comes on, the check tire pressure system may not be working properly. See your dealer for service. (Also, see
“Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light” in the Index).
This system is called OBD II (On Board
Diagnostics Second Generation) and is intended to assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
2-71
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light on, after a while, your emission controls may not work as well, your fuel economy may not be as good and your engine may not run as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be covered by your warranty.
NOTICE:
Modifications made to the engine, transaxle, exhaust or fuel system of your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other than those of the same Tire Performance Criteria
(TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission controls and may cause the SERVICE ENGINE SOON light to come on. Modifications to these systems could lead to costly repairs not covered by your warranty. This may also result in a failure to pass a required Emission Inspection/Maintenance test.
2-72
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is working, when the ignition is on and the engine is not running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
D Light Flashing - A misfire condition has been detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and may damage the emission control system on your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required.
D Light On Steady - An emission control system malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and service may be required.
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle:
D Reducing vehicle speed.
D Avoiding hard accelerations.
D Avoiding steep uphill grades.
D If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your dealer or qualified service center for service.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install the cap. See “Filling Your Tank” in the Index. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition will usually be corrected when the electrical system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel
(see “Fuel” in the Index). Poor fuel quality will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start up, stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions, change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off, have your dealer or qualified service center check the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that may have developed.
2-73
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or may begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things you need to know in order to help your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
SERVICE ENGINE SOON light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on board diagnostic) system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if you have recently replaced your battery or if your battery has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical emission control systems during normal driving. This may take several days of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, see your dealer or qualified service center to prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Oil Pressure Gage
United States Canada
Readings above the red warning zone indicate the normal operating range. Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside temperature and oil viscosity.
A reading in the red warning zone may be caused by a low oil level or another problem causing low oil pressure. On vehicles with the systems monitor, the
CHECK GAGES light will come on and a warning chime will sound.
2-74
On vehicles with the optional DIC, a CHECK GAGES
OIL PRESSURE message will be displayed and a warning chime will sound. See “DIC Warnings and
Messages” in the Index for more information.
CAUTION:
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Damage to your engine from neglected oil problems can be costly and is not covered by your warranty.
Check Oil Level Warning Light
(If Equipped)
The CHECK OIL LEVEL light is part of the systems monitor. This light comes on for five seconds as a bulb check each time the ignition key is turned to RUN.
If the engine oil is more than 1 quart (0.95 L) low and the engine has been shut off for at least eight minutes, the CHECK OIL LEVEL light will come on and a chime will sound the next time you start your vehicle.
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL light comes on, the engine oil level should be checked at the dipstick then brought up to the proper level, if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
On vehicles with the optional DIC, the CHECK OIL
LEVEL light is replaced by an OIL LEVEL LOW message. See “DIC Warnings and Messages” in the
Index for more information.
2-75
Service Vehicle Soon Light (If Equipped)
This light will come on briefly as a bulb check when your ignition is turned to RUN.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
(If Equipped)
This light is part of the systems monitor. It will come on and a warning chime will sound when the washer fluid container is less than one third full.
This light will come on and a warning chime will sound if you have a certain non emissions related vehicle problem. These problems may not be so obvious and may not affect vehicle performance or durability.
Consult a qualified dealership for necessary repairs to maintain top vehicle performance.
On vehicles with the supercharged engine and the optional DIC, the SERVICE VEHICLE SOON light is replaced by the SERVICE VEHICLE SOON message.
See “DIC Warnings and Messages” in the Index for more information.
On vehicles with the optional DIC, the WASHER
FLUID light is replaced by the WASHER FLUID LOW message. See “DIC Warnings and Messages” in the
Index for more information.
2-76
Check Gages Warning Light (If Equipped)
This light is part of the systems monitor. It will come on briefly as a bulb check when your ignition is turned to RUN.
If this light comes on and stays on while you are driving, check your gages for fuel, coolant temperature, oil pressure and voltage.
This light will stay on if the engine is not running and the ignition is in RUN.
Door Ajar Light (If Equipped)
This light is part of the systems monitor. It will come on and a warning chime will sound when the driver’s door or one of the passenger’s doors is not completely closed.
On vehicles with the optional DIC, the door that is ajar will be shown as a icon next to the vehicle outline and a message will appear on the display. See “DIC Warnings and Messages” in the Index for more information.
Trunk Ajar Light (If Equipped)
This light is part of the systems monitor. It will come on and a warning chime will sound when the trunk is not completely closed.
On vehicles with the optional DIC, the TRUNK AJAR light is replaced by the TRUNK AJAR message.
See “DIC Warnings and Messages” in the Index for more information.
2-77
Fuel Gage
United States Canada
When the ignition is on, your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have in your tank.
When the gage reads in the yellow band, a warning chime will sound and the CHECK GAGES warning light will come on. You still have a little fuel left, but you need to get more fuel right away.
On vehicles with the optional DIC, the CHECK GAGES
LOW FUEL message will be displayed when the fuel gage reads in the yellow band. See “DIC Warnings and
Messages” in the Index for more information.
Here are some things that owner’s ask about. None of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
D At the service station, the gas pump shuts off before the gage reads full.
D It take a little more (or less) fuel to fill up than the gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more (or less) than half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
2-78
Boost Gage (If Equipped)
Vehicles equipped with the supercharged engine have this boost gage that indicates vacuum during light to moderate throttle and boost under heavier throttle.
The gage displays the air pressure level going into the engine’s combustion chamber.
The gage is automatically centered at zero every time the ignition key is turned to RUN. Actual vacuum or boost is displayed from this zero point. Changes in ambient pressure, such as driving in mountains and changing weather, will slightly change the zero reading.
Head
-
Up Display (Option)
CAUTION:
If the HUD image is too bright, or too high in your field of view, it may take you more time to see things you need to see when it’s dark outside.
Be sure to keep the HUD image dim and placed low in your field of view.
If you have the optional Head Up Display (HUD), you can see some of the driver information also available on your instrument panel cluster. The information may be displayed in English or metric units and appears as a reflection on the windshield. The HUD shows:
D Speedometer Reading
D Turn Signal Indicators
D High beam Indicator Symbol
D CHECK GAGES Message (for low oil pressure, high coolant temperature, low oil level, high/low battery, brake, ABS and air bag.)
D Low Fuel Warning Symbol
D Radio Frequency and Playback Mode
2-79
HUD shows these images when they are lighted on the instrument panel.
The speedometer may display a difference of 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) from the HUD image. This is normal.
When the ignition key is turned to RUN, all possible
HUD images will come on, then the HUD will operate normally.
If you never look at your instrument panel cluster, you may not see something important, such as a warning light. So be sure to scan your displays and controls and the driving environment just as you would in a vehicle without HUD.
NOTICE:
Although the HUD image appears to be near the front of the vehicle, do not use it as a parking aid.
The HUD was not designed for that purpose.
If you try to use it that way, such as in a parking lot, you may misjudge distance and run into something.
2-80
The HUD controls are located to the left of the steering column.
1. Start your engine and turn the HUD dimmer all of the way clockwise.
The brightness of the HUD image is determined by ambient light, and where you have set the HUD dimmer control.
2. Adjust the seat, if necessary, before setting the height control.
Press and hold the top of the IMAGE (image height) control, raising the HUD image as far as possible.
Then press on the bottom of the HUD image height control to move the image down, so the image is as low as possible, but in full view.
3. Turn the dimmer control counterclockwise until the
HUD image is no brighter than necessary. To turn the
HUD off, rotate the HUD dimmer control all the way counterclockwise.
If the sun comes out, or it becomes cloudy, or if you turn on your headlamps, you may need to adjust the HUD brightness using the HUD dimmer control. Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD image harder to see.
Clean the inside of the windshield as needed to remove any dirt or film that reduces the sharpness or clarity of the HUD image.
Spray household glass cleaner on a soft, clean cloth.
Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry it. Do not spray cleaner directly on the lens, because the cleaner fluid could leak inside the unit.
2-81
If you can’t see the HUD image when the ignition is on, check to see if:
D The HUD unit is covered,
D the HUD dimmer control is adjusted correctly,
D the HUD image is adjusted to the proper height, or
D a fuse in the fuse panel may be blown. See “Fuses and Circuit Breakers” in the Index.
If the HUD image is not clear, it could be too bright.
Move the HUD dimmer control further downward.
You may need to clean the windshield and HUD lens.
Your windshield is part of the HUD system. If you ever have to have a new windshield, be sure to get one designed for HUD. If you don’t, the HUD image may look blurred and out of focus.
Systems Monitor (If Equipped)
If you have the systems monitor, it gives you important safety and maintenance facts about your vehicle.
When you turn the ignition on, the systems monitor and warning lights will briefly light up. If a problem is detected, the warning lights will turn on and a chime will sound.
2-82
The following warning lights are displayed in the systems monitor:
D CHECK OIL LEVEL: This message could mean your oil level is low. If it comes on for more than five seconds, see “Check Oil Level Warning Light” in the Index.
D WASHER FLUID: This message means your washer fluid tank is less than about 30 percent full.
If this light comes on, see “Low Washer Fluid
Warning Light” in the Index.
D DOOR AJAR: This message means that either the driver’s door or one of the passenger’s doors is not completely closed. If this light comes on, see “Door
Ajar Light” in the Index.
D TIRE PRESS: This message means one or more of your tires may be low. See “Check Tire Pressure
System” in the Index.
D CHECK GAGES: This means one or more of your gages may be in their respective warning bands.
If this light comes on, see “Check Gages Warning
Light” in the Index.
D TRUNK AJAR: This message means your trunk is not completely closed.
The following buttons are on the systems monitor control panel which is located to the right of the instrument panel cluster:
D E/M: Use this button to change the display between
English and metric units.
D TRIP RESET: This button allows you to reset your trip odometer. To reset the trip odometer, press the
TRIP RESET button. The trip odometer will now accumulate miles (kilometers) until the next reset.
D TIRE PRESS RESET: This button allows you to reset the check tire pressure system. To reset the system or for more information, see “Check Tire
Pressure System” in the Index.
2-83
Driver Information Center
(DIC) (Option)
Your vehicle may have the optional Driver Information
Center (DIC). The DIC will display information about how your vehicle is functioning, as well as warning messages if a system problem is detected.
DIC Displays and Controls
There are two lines in the
DIC display. The bottom line on the display area is left blank when the DIC displays the driver number identified when entering the vehicle.
When you turn the ignition on, the DIC will display your
DRIVER NUMBER. The system will then perform a status check and display any messages if a problem is detected.
If there are no problems detected, the display will return to the mode selected by that driver the last time the ignition was turned off.
If a problem is detected, a diagnostic message will appear in the display. The following information will show the messages you may see on the DIC display.
The message center is continuously updated with the vehicle’s performance status.
You can have your dealer program your name to replace the driver identifier. See your dealer for more information.
2-84
The following buttons are on the DIC control panel which is located to the right of the instrument panel cluster:
D TRIP RESET: Allows you to reset your trip odometer. To reset the trip odometer, press the TRIP
RESET button. The trip odometer will now accumulate miles (kilometers) until the next reset.
D MODE: Use this button to toggle through the DIC modes (Vehicle Data, blank, Personalization
Programming, Compass Calibration).
D SELECT: Use this button to select a DIC mode.
D RESET: This button, used along with other buttons, will reset system functions.
D E/M: Use this button to change the display between
English and metric units.
Vehicle Data
Average Fuel Economy: Press the SELECT button until the display shows AVG FUEL ECONOMY.
Average fuel economy is viewed as a long term approximation of your overall driving conditions.
To learn the average fuel economy from a new starting point, press the RESET button for five seconds while the average fuel economy is displayed in the DIC.
Instantaneous Fuel Economy: Press the SELECT button until the display shows INST FUEL ECONOMY.
Instantaneous fuel economy varies with your driving conditions, such as acceleration, braking and the grade of the road being traveled. The RESET button does not function in this mode.
Fuel Range: Press the SELECT button until the display shows FUEL RANGE. The fuel range will calculate the remaining distance you can drive without refueling. This calculation is based on the average fuel economy for the last 25 miles (40.25 km) driven, and the fuel remaining in the fuel tank. If the fuel range drops below 40 miles
(64.4 km), the display will show FUEL RANGE LOW.
The RESET button does not function in this mode.
2-85
Battery Volts: On vehicles with a supercharged engine, press the SELECT button until the display shows
BATTERY VOLTS. If the voltage is normal the display will show BATTERY ## VOLTS. If the voltage drops below 10.5 volts for 30 seconds, the battery volts display will show BATTERY LOW. If the voltage is above 16.2 volts for 30 seconds, the battery volts display will show BATTERY HIGH. If the display shows the high or low message, you need to have your battery checked.
GM Oil Life System t: Press the SELECT button until OIL LIFE appears in the display. The OIL LIFE
NORMAL display will show an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. When the oil life index is less than
10%, an ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON message will be displayed and the oil life display will show OIL LIFE
CHANGE. When the oil life index is less than 5%, an
ENGINE OIL CHANGE NOW message will be displayed and the oil life display will show OIL LIFE CHANGE
NOW. When you have the oil changed according to the maintenance schedule, you will have to reset the Oil Life
System. To reset the Oil Life System, see “Oil Life
System” in the Index. Also, see “Engine Oil, When to
Change” and “Maintenance Schedule” in the Index.
Tire Pressure Status: Press the SELECT button until
TIRE PRESSURE appears in the display. TIRE
PRESSURE NORMAL is displayed when the Check Tire
Pressure System believes your vehicle’s tire pressures are normal. If a potential problem is detected, the display will show CHECK TIRE PRESSURE and the tire pressure status will show TIRE PRESSURE LOW. If you see the
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message, you should stop as soon as you can and check all your tires for damage.
(If a tire is flat, see “If a Tire Goes Flat” in the Index.)
Also check the tire pressure in all four tires as soon as you can. See “Inflation Tire Pressure” and “Check
Tire Pressure System”in the Index.
2-86
Electronic Compass
Some vehicles are equipped with an electronic compass.
As with all compasses, this unit senses the earth’s magnetic field to show the direction the vehicle is pointing.
Choosing Your Zone Number
The earth’s magnetic field is not always the same direction as true north as we know it. So, you must enter a zone number to tell the compass the difference between magnetic and actual north. This tells the compass where in the country you are driving.
The compass remembers your zone, so you only have to change it if you drive to a new zone on the map. The compass adjusts only a small amount for each zone, so you may not notice a difference if you drive from one zone to the next one, until you cross several zones.
Locate your zone number on the above map.
If your number is different than the one shown when you turn the key on, follow the steps to change your zone number.
If you live on the line, you can pick the zone area you are most likely to drive in. (In Alaska, use Zone 9 or 10.
In Hawaii, use Zone 7).
2-87
Changing Your Zone Number
1. Press MODE to display COMPASS CALIBRATION.
2. Press SELECT to display RESET CHANGES ZONE.
3. Press RESET until your number appears.
4. Press MODE to exit the COMPASS CALIBRATION
MODE and store the new zone number. When the
MODE button is pressed, the DIC will return to the
VEHICLE DATA mode.
Calibrating the Compass
All electronic compasses need to know the magnetic profile of your vehicle. This is called calibration and is done automatically by your compass. But, the feature is available if you would like to manually calibrate.
Sometimes, strong magnetic fields can affect the compass. If the compass display does not show a direction, and CALIBRATE COMPASS is displayed on the DIC, try calibrating the compass as follows:
1. Drive the vehicle to an open, flat area.
2. Press MODE to display COMPASS CALIBRATION.
3. Press SELECT to display PRESS RESET TO
RECALIBRATE and then press the RESET button.
4. The display will change to SLOWLY DRIVE IN
SMALL CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in small circles. Don’t drive faster than 10 mph (16 km/h).
5. Continue to drive in circles until the CALIBRATION
COMPLETE is displayed on the DIC and a direction is shown for the compass.
Your compass should be calibrated. You will know this when a direction is shown and the CALIBRATE
COMPASS message is no longer displayed.
Compass Accuracy
Your compass may show different headings around bridges, power lines, large metal objects and steep hills.
This is normal and is true of compasses in general.
If you put large metal objects like golf clubs in the trunk they could affect accuracy. If the affect is minimal, the compass will adapt to these objects over time.
If you use an antenna with a magnetic base, it is best to mount it away from the center of the trunk near the rear window.
The rear defog system can affect accuracy, and the compass corrects for the rear defog. However, if the rear defog is turned on while making sharp turns, the accuracy may be off. When you turn the rear defog off again, the accuracy returns to normal.
2-88
Be aware that metal objects are sometimes buried in the ground. They can affect accuracy and you may not know they are there. As an example, many concrete roads have metal reinforcements inside.
Also, if you drive with the trunk open, this could affect accuracy and could decalibrate the compass.
Driver Identifier DIC Display
This feature allows two different drivers to store and recall their own preferred display mode. The personalization settings displayed on the DIC are determined by the transmitter used to enter the vehicle.
After the unlock button of a remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed and the ignition is in RUN, the
DIC will display the identified driver. The settings can also be changed by briefly pressing one of the
MEMORY buttons located on the driver’s door.
The DIC is used to program information for
DRIVER #1 and DRIVER #2. The DIC will identify a person as UNKNOWN DRIVER if they are neither
DRIVER #1 nor DRIVER #2.
DIC Personalization Programming
The DIC can be used to program the following personalization features available with your vehicle:
D Automatic Door Locks
D Window Lockout
D Security Feedback
D Delayed Locking
D Perimeter Lighting
D Memory Seats
D Parallel Park Assist Mirror (Tilt Mirror)
D Driver ID
The DIC is used to program the personal choices of two drivers. The drivers are recognized as DRIVER #1 and DRIVER #2. You will let the DIC know which driver you are by using your remote keyless entry transmitter or by pressing the appropriate memory seat control button located on the driver’s door or choosing the driver with the DIC. Each remote keyless entry transmitter was preprogrammed to belong to
DRIVER #1 or DRIVER #2. Each transmitter may be programmed differently for each driver.
2-89
When you press the button with the unlock symbol on your transmitter, the DIC will automatically change driver numbers and the vehicle will recall the personalization settings that were last made to correspond to your transmitter, including your radio and comfort control settings. See “Comfort Controls
Personalization” in the Index.
If you unlock the vehicle using your door key instead of your transmitter, the DIC will not change drivers and will recall the information from the last transmitter use or the last driver change using the memory seat controls.
If this happens and you were not the last driver of the vehicle, simply press your correct driver number on the memory seat controls or press the button with the unlock symbol on your transmitter or select the personalization programming mode and choose the correct driver number.
Use the following steps for personalization programming instructions.
1. Turn the ignition on and keep the transaxle in
PARK (P).
2. Press the MODE button to reach personalization programming display.
3. Press the SELECT button to enter personalization programming mode.
4. The first choice to be made will be DRIVER ID 1 or
2. Press the RESET button to toggle between your selections within a display and SELECT to choose the current selection and move on to the next personalization feature.
You are now in the selection mode and the DIC is ready to program your personal choices in memory.
Each feature that can be personalized will appear in the display. Once you have made a selection for a feature, the DIC will move on to the next personalization feature.
2-90
Scroll through the following messages and feature options:
D AUTO DOOR LOCKS OFF/ON
D UNLOCK OFF/ON
D UNLOCK KEY OFF/PARK
D DOOR TO UNLOCK DRIVER/ALL
D WINDOW LOCKOUT R + PASS/REAR
D KEYLESS FEEDBACK OFF/ON
D LIGHTS FEEDBACK OFF/ON
D HORN FEEDBACK OFF/ON
D DELAYED LOCKING OFF/ON
D PERIMETER LIGHTS OFF/ON
D PERIMETER LIGHTS TIMEOUT 15 SEC
D SEAT RECALL OFF/ON
D RECALL POSITION MEMORY/EXIT
D TILT MIRROR OFF/ON
D DRIVER ID OFF/ON
If you would like to exit the selection mode without moving through each of the personalization features, simply press a different button on the DIC or turn off the ignition. The personal choices you made will still be retained, even without passing through each of the features.
If you happen to move past a selection you would like to make a personal choice for, press unlock on your transmitter or press the appropriate driver number on the memory seat control. This will return you to the beginning of the option feature programming mode.
A description of each feature programmable through the
DIC follows.
Automatic Door Locks
The door lock modes when shifting in and out of
PARK (P), can be changed through the DIC. You can change these modes by different selections of the following DIC displays:
D AUTO DOOR LOCKS OFF/ON
D UNLOCK OFF/ON
D UNLOCK KEY OFF/PARK
D DOOR TO UNLOCK DRIVER/ALL
2-91
If you choose OFF for AUTO DOOR LOCKS, your door locks will operate normally with no automatic feature.
If you choose ON for AUTO DOOR LOCKS, ON for
UNLOCK and KEY OFF, your doors will lock every time you shift out of PARK (P), and the doors will unlock every time you stop and turn the ignition to OFF.
If you choose ON for AUTO DOOR LOCKS, ON for
UNLOCK and PARK, your doors will lock every time you shift out of PARK (P), and the doors will unlock every time you stop and shift into PARK (P).
If you choose ON for AUTO DOOR LOCKS, and OFF for UNLOCK, your doors will lock every time you shift out of PARK (P), and there will be no automatic door unlock when shifting back into PARK (P).
If you choose ON for UNLOCK and DRIVER for
DOOR TO UNLOCK, only the driver’s door will automatically unlock when shifting into PARK (P) or turning the key to OFF.
If you choose ON for UNLOCK and ALL for DOOR
TO UNLOCK, all doors will automatically unlock when shifting into PARK (P) or turning the key to OFF.
To change modes:
1. Move the arrow on the display between the selections by pressing the RESET button.
2. Once you have made your selection, press the SELECT button and your choice will be retained in memory.
See “Automatic Door Locks” in the Index for more information about this feature.
Window Lockout Personalization
The number of passenger windows locked out by the window LOCK switch can be programmed through the DIC.
If you choose R + PASS, all three passenger window switches will be inactive when the window LOCK switch is enabled.
If you choose REAR, only the two rear passenger window switches will be locked out when the window
LOCK switch is enabled.
To change modes:
1. Move the arrow on the display between R + PASS and REAR by pressing the RESET button.
2. Once you have made your selection, press the SELECT button. Your choice will be retained in memory.
For more information on this feature, see “Window
Lock” in the Index.
2-92
Security Feedback
By choosing different combinations of these selections, you can choose the type of transmitter activated feedback when locking and unlocking your vehicle with your transmitter. Each time you make a selection by pressing the RESET button, press the SELECT button to record your choice.
D KEYLESS FEEDBACK OFF/ON
D LIGHTS FEEDBACK OFF/ON
D HORN FEEDBACK OFF/ON
If you choose ON for KEYLESS FEEDBACK you will also need to choose LIGHTS and/or HORN FEEDBACK.
You can select the following modes:
D If you choose OFF for KEYLESS FEEDBACK, you will receive no security feedback when locking or unlocking your vehicle.
D If you choose ON for KEYLESS FEEDBACK and
ON for LIGHTS FEEDBACK, the exterior lamps will flash twice when unlocking your vehicle and once when locking your vehicle.
D If you choose ON for KEYLESS FEEDBACK and
ON for HORN FEEDBACK, your horn will chirp when locking and unlocking your vehicle.
D If you choose ON for KEYLESS, LIGHTS and
HORN FEEDBACK, your exterior lamps will flash twice at the first unlock button press, your exterior lamps will flash twice and your horn will chirp once at the second unlock button press, and the exterior lamps will flash once and the horn will chirp once when locking your vehicle.
For more information on this feature, see “Security
Feedback” in the Index.
Delayed Locking
The delayed locking feature, which delays the actual locking of the vehicle, can be made active or inactive through the DIC. When DELAYED
LOCKING OFF/ON appears on the display, use the RESET button to toggle the arrow between
OFF and ON. When you have made your choice, press the SELECT button to record your selection.
For more information on this feature, see “Delayed
Locking” in the Index.
2-93
Perimeter Lighting Personalization
When the button with the unlock symbol on the transmitter is pressed, the Daytime Running Lamps
(high beams at reduced intensity), parking lamps and back up lamps will turn on if it is dark enough according to the Twilight Sentinel
R
.
You can control activation of this feature by choosing
OFF or ON when the PERIMETER LIGHTS choice is displayed on the DIC. Make your choice by pressing the
RESET button and record your choice by pressing the
SELECT button. You will then be prompted to choose a
TIMEOUT period.
The PERIMETER LIGHTS TIMEOUT feature can be changed to desired setting by using the RESET button to toggle from 5 to 30 seconds. Each toggle will increase the time by five seconds. Once the desired timeout is displayed, press select to record your choice and move on to the next personalization feature.
For more information on this feature, see “Perimeter
Lighting” in the Index.
Memory Seat Recall (If Equipped)
This feature recalls the position of your seat. When this feature is active, the memory seat and mirror positions will be recalled for the identified driver when the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to enter the vehicle.
You can program this feature to be active by choosing
ON when the SEAT RECALL choice appears, or inactive by choosing OFF when the SEAT RECALL choice appears on the DIC. Make your choices by pressing the RESET button and store them to memory by pressing the SELECT button.
You can also program this feature to recall your memory seat position or the exit seat position.
D Memory Position: Choose ON when the SEAT
RECALL choice appears and then choose MEMORY when the RECALL POSITION choice appears.
D Exit Position: Choose ON when the SEAT RECALL choice appears and then choose EXIT when the
RECALL POSITION choice appears. The seat will move when you enter the vehicle after unlocking it with a remote keyless entry transmitter. This will allow for easy entry.
For more information on this feature, see “Memory Seat and Mirrors” in the Index.
2-94
Parallel Park Assist (If Equipped)
The parallel park assist mirror, which tips the passenger mirror while the vehicle is in REVERSE (R), can be made active or inactive through the DIC. When TILT
MIRROR OFF/ON appears on the display, use the
RESET button to toggle the arrow between OFF and
ON. When you have made your choice, press the
SELECT button to record your selection. For more information on this feature, see “Mirrors” in the Index.
Driver ID
This feature displays the DRIVER ID, as identified by the DIC. If this feature is ON, the DRIVER ID will be displayed every time the ignition is turned on. If the
DRIVER ID is OFF, the DRIVER ID can be displayed by pressing either a button on the remote keyless entry transmitter or a memory seat button. Vehicles are delivered with this feature ON.
DIC Warnings and Messages
Other messages or warnings may appear in the DIC display. For Canadian drivers, in addition to the DIC message your DIC will display EXP with a number after it which reflects the following messages:
EXP (Export ID)
3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Message
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
11
16
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK GAGES LOW FUEL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . ENGINE HOT A/C DISABLED
20
24
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TURN SIGNAL ON?
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TRUNK AJAR
25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WASHER FLUID LOW
27
33
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
STARTING DISABLED THEFT *
34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM
35 . . . . . . . . . . CHECK GAGES OIL PRESSURE *
36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OIL LEVEL LOW
37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BRAKE FLUID LOW *
40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ALARM OCCURRED
44 . . . . . . . . . CHECK GAGES TEMPERATURE *
54 . . . . . . . . . . . . SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM
61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK GAS CAP
81 . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENGINE OIL CHANGE SOON
82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ENGINE OIL CHANGE NOW
2-95
EXP (Export ID) Warning Message
83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SERVICE AIR BAG
102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK CHARGE SYSTEM
140
141
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
FRONT PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
143 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
144
147
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PARK BRAKE SET *
The EXP codes are used to make translation from
English to other languages easier.
Pressing any of the DIC control buttons will remove the above messages or warnings from the DIC display, unless noted by an asterisk (*).
SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM 54 : If you ever see the SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM message, it means there may be a problem with your stability enhancement system. If you see this message, try to reset the system (stop; turn off the engine; then start the engine again). If the SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM message still comes on, it means there is a problem. You should see your dealer for service. Reduce your speed and drive accordingly.
Tire Pressure Status 144 : If you see the CHECK
TIRE PRESSURE message, you should stop as soon as you can and check all your tires for damage. (If a tire is flat, see “If a Tire Goes Flat” in the Index.) Also check the tire pressure in all four tires as soon as you can.
See “Inflation Tire Pressure” and “Check Tire
Pressure System” in the Index.
2-96
Section 3 Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle.
Be sure to read about the particular systems supplied with your vehicle.
3 13 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player with Programmable Equalization and Radio
Data System (RDS) (If Equipped)
3 20 AM FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player with Programmable Equalization and Radio
Data System (RDS) (If Equipped)
3 27 AM FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player with Programmable
Equalization and Radio Data System (RDS)
3 36 Trunk Mounted CD Changer (Option)
3 40 Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped)
3 41 Understanding Radio Reception
3 42 Tips About Your Audio System
3 43 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
3 43 Care of Your Compact Discs
3 44 Care of Your Compact Disc Player
3-
3-1
Comfort Controls
This section tells you how to make your air system work for you.
With these systems, you can control the heating, cooling and ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehicle also has a flow through ventilation system described later in this section.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passenger compartment air filter. For more information, see
“Passenger Compartment Air Filter” in the Index.
Comfort Controls Personalization
(If Equipped)
This feature allows two different drivers to store and recall their own climate control settings for temperature, air delivery mode and fan speed. The personal choice settings recalled are determined by the transmitter used to enter the vehicle. After the button with the unlock symbol on a remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed, and the ignition is in RUN, the climate control will adjust to the last settings of the identified driver. The settings can also be changed by pressing one of the memory buttons (1 or 2) located on the driver’s door, until you hear two beeps. When adjustments are made, the new settings are automatically saved for that driver.
3-2
Standard Climate Control System
Fan Knob
The left knob regulates the force of the air coming through the system. Turn the knob clockwise to increase the fan speed and counterclockwise to decrease the fan speed. Push the knob to turn the fan off. The fan must be on to run the air conditioning compressor.
Temperature Knob
The right knob regulates the temperature of the air coming through the system. Turn it toward the blue area for cooler air. Turn it toward the red area for warmer air.
Mode Buttons
You may choose the direction of air delivery by selecting one of the five mode control buttons.
PANEL: This setting directs airflow through the upper air outlets located in the instrument panel.
BI LEVEL: This setting directs airflow through both the upper air outlets and the lower floor outlets.
There is also a small amount of air directed to the front defroster and the side window defrosters.
FLOOR: This setting directs most of the airflow to the lower floor outlets with some airflow directed to the side window defrosters. There is also a small amount of airflow directed to the front defroster.
DEFOG: This setting directs most of the airflow to the lower floor outlets and the front windshield defroster. A small amount of airflow is directed to the side window defroster outlets. This mode can be useful to remove the moisture from the inside of the windshield when the outside temperature is cold or the humidity is high.
FRONT: This setting directs most of the airflow to the front windshield defroster with some airflow to the side window defrosters and lower floor outlets.
To improve windshield clearing performance when you select FRONT defrost, your air conditioning compressor will run automatically above approximately 40
_F (4_C).
This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield.
Even though the compressor may be running, the A/C light will not come on in FRONT defrost unless you select A/C.
Recirc Button
RECIRC: Press this button to limit the amount of outside air entering your vehicle. This is helpful when you are trying to quickly cool the interior of the vehicle or to limit odors entering the vehicle. RECIRC may be selected in all manual airflow modes except FRONT defrost. If you select RECIRC while in defrost, the
RECIRC light will flash to let you know that this is not allowed. This is to help prevent fogging.
3-3
When the weather is cool or damp, operating in
RECIRC for extended periods of time may cause fogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the fog, switch back to outside air by turning off RECIRC, select either DEFOG or FRONT defrost mode and increase the fan speed. To avoid refogging of the windows, minimize your use of RECIRC under these conditions and turn the
A/C on to help dehumidify the air.
A/C Button
A/C: Press this button to turn the air conditioning compressor on and off. The system will cool and dehumidify the air inside your vehicle. If your comfort control system is off, you can also turn it back on in
PANEL mode by selecting the A/C button.
Even though A/C is not selected, in FRONT defrost mode the A/C compressor will run automatically at temperatures over approximately 40
_F (4_C) to improve windshield clearing performance.
Electronic Climate Control System (Option)
Temperature Knob (Driver’s Side)
The driver’s side knob changes the temperature of the air coming through the system on the driver’s side.
Turn the knob toward the blue area to decrease the set temperature. Turn the knob toward the red area to increase the set temperature. When this knob is adjusted, the word DRIVER will be displayed under the set temperature. When the passenger’s set temperature is not active, this knob controls both the driver’s and passenger’s side, and both DRIVER and PASS will be displayed under the set temperature.
3-4
Temperature Knob (Passenger’s Side)
The passenger’s side knob changes the temperature of the air coming through the system on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. Turn the knob toward the blue area to decrease the set temperature. Turn the knob toward the red area to increase the set temperature. When this knob is adjusted, only the word PASS will be displayed under the set temperature.
Fan Button
The button with the fan symbol allows you to manually adjust the fan speed. Press the HIGH side to increase fan speed and the LOW side to decrease fan speed.
Mode Button
Press this button to manually select the air delivery mode to the floor, panel or windshield outlets. The system will stay in the selected mode until the MODE or AUTO button is pushed.
Auto Button
Press the AUTO button to set the system to automatically control the air delivery mode, fan speed,
A/C and RECIRC operations. Whenever you press
AUTO, the display will change to show the current driver set temperature, automatic air delivery mode and fan speed. After five seconds the display will change back to the EXT (external) temperature outside the vehicle.
Display
In full AUTO mode, the electronic climate control system display will show the outside temperature, labeled EXT for external temperature, and AUTO.
If you press the MODE button to select an air delivery mode, the display will change to also show you the current system mode. If you press HIGH or LOW on the fan button, the display will change to show the selected fan speed. After five seconds, the display will change back to show the EXT temperature and the selected manual setting.
3-5
Automatic Operation
When the system is set for AUTO, your climate control system will control the air delivery mode, fan speed,
A/C and RECIRC operations. Air will come from the floor, panel or windshield outlets. The fan speed will vary as the system maintains the selected temperature setting.
When AUTO is selected, the A/C operation and air inlet will be automatically controlled. The air conditioning compressor will run at outside temperatures over approximately 40
_F (4_C). The air inlet will normally be set to outside air. If it’s hot outside, the air inlet will automatically switch to recirculated inside air to help quickly cool down your vehicle.
To find your comfort zone, start with 75
_ F (24_C) temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate. Turn the TEMP knob up or down to adjust the temperature setting if necessary. If you choose the temperature setting of 60
_F (15_C), the system will remain at the maximum cooling setting and fan speed.
If you choose the temperature setting of 90
_F (33_C), the system will remain at the maximum heat setting and fan speed. Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the system to heat or cool any faster.
Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the top of the instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor regulates temperature based on sun load.
The EXT (exterior) temperature sensor is located in the front of the vehicle behind the grille. The displayed temperature is most accurate after the vehicle has been moving for a few minutes. If the vehicle is stopped and then restarted within 2 1/2 hours, the sensor will be hot from the engine heat. In this case, the temperature first displayed will continue to be the previous temperature.
The display will update after the vehicle has been moving for a few minutes and the sensor has a chance to cool down to the actual temperature.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on engine coolant temperature. Pushing the fan button will override this delay and change the fan to a selected speed.
3-6
Manual Operation
You may also manually adjust the air delivery mode or fan speed.
FLOOR: Manually selecting FLOOR mode by cycling through the MODE settings will deliver air to the floor outlets.
DEFOG: Manually selecting DEFOG by cycling through the MODE settings will deliver air to the floor and windshield outlets.
BI LEVEL: Manually selecting BI LEVEL by cycling through the MODE settings will deliver warm air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets.
PANEL: Manually selecting PANEL by cycling through the MODE setting will deliver air to the instrument panel outlets.
DRIVER PUSH OFF: Press this knob to turn the system off. Some fresh air will continue to flow through the vehicle from the FLOOR outlets, and the system will try to maintain the previously chosen comfort setting.
PASSENGER PUSH OFF: Press this knob to cancel the passenger’s set temperature. The passenger’s set temperature will be set equal to the driver’s set temperature. Both the words DRIVER and PASS will be displayed under the set temperature in the display area.
A/C: Press this button to turn the air conditioning compressor on and off. When A/C is selected or in
AUTO mode, the system will run the A/C automatically to cool and dehumidify the air inside the vehicle. If you select A/C OFF while in FRONT defrost, the A/C OFF text will flash to let you know this is not allowed. This is to prevent fogging.
RECIRC: Press this button to limit the amount of outside air entering your vehicle. You may use this setting to limit odors entering your vehicle. Press
RECIRC to recirculate inside air until the RECIRC button is pressed again or the OUTSIDE AIR button is pressed.
If you select RECIRC while in defrost the RECIRC light will flash to let you know this is not allowed. This is to prevent fogging.
3-7
When the weather is cool or damp, operating in
RECIRC for extended periods of time may cause fogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the fog, press the OUTSIDE AIR button and select either DEFOG or
FRONT defrost. Be sure A/C OFF is not selected to allow the air conditioning compressor to run automatically and help dehumidify the air.
OUTSIDE AIR: Press this button to allow fresh air to enter your vehicle if you currently have RECIRC selected. You may also override the system’s automatic use of RECIRC by selecting OUTSIDE AIR.
FRONT: Press this button to clear the windshield.
The system will automatically control the fan speed if you select defrost from AUTO. If the outside temperature is 38
_F (3_C) or warmer, your air conditioning compressor will automatically run to help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield.
Air Conditioning
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows closed for the air conditioner to work its best.
If you have the standard system, for quick cool down on very hot days, use the airflow from the PANEL outlets, press RECIRC and A/C with the temperature knob in the blue area. If this max A/C setting is used for long periods of time, the air in your vehicle may become too cold and dry. For normal cooling on hot days, use
A/C without RECIRC with the temperature knob in the blue area.
If you have the electronic system, in AUTO mode the system will cool and dehumidify the air inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode, the system will maximize its performance by using RECIRC as necessary.
On cool, but sunny days, with the standard system or through manual operation of the electronic system, use
BI LEVEL to deliver warm air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, turn the TEMP knob up or down.
3-8
Heating
If you have the standard system, on cold days use
FLOOR with the temperature knob in the red area. If you have the electronic system, press AUTO and adjust the temperature by turning the TEMP knob up or down.
You may also adjust the electronic system manually by pressing the MODE button and selecting FLOOR.
Again, adjust the temperature by turning the TEMP knob up or down.
With either system, outside air will be heated and sent through the floor outlets. The heater works best if you keep your windows closed while using it.
Defogging and Defrosting
On cool, humid days, use DEFOG to keep the windshield and side windows clear. Use FRONT defrost to remove fog or ice from the windshield quickly in extremely humid or cold conditions.
If you have the standard system, select DEFOG and adjust the fan speed to your comfort level. Turn the A/C on to help dehumidify the air. Use FRONT defrost with the temperature toward the red area and the fan control toward high.
If you have the electronic system and select FRONT defrost or DEFOG from AUTO, the system will control the fan speed. Adjust the temperature and fan speed to your comfort level. After the windshield is clear, adjust the temperature to your normal setting and select the
AUTO button and return to AUTO mode and fan control.
For maximum FRONT defrost performance under extreme icing or frosting conditions, increase the temperature setting to 90
_F (33_C) and increase the fan speed to high.
3-9
Rear Window Defogger
The lines you see on the rear window warm the glass. Press the button to start warming your window.
A light will glow in the button while the defogger is working.
NOTICE:
Do not try to clear frost or other material from the inside of the rear window with a razor blade or anything else that is sharp. This may damage the defogger grid. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors, this button will activate them.
After 10 minutes it will turn off by itself, or press the button during the heating cycle to turn it off. If you need additional warming time, push the button again. The system will then operate for five minutes before turning off by itself. If your speed is maintained over 30 mph
(48 km/h), the rear defog will not turn off automatically to help keep the rear glass clear.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license, tape or decals across the defogger grid on the rear window.
Ventilation System
For mild outside temperatures when little heating or cooling is needed, use the panel outlet setting (on the standard system) to direct outside air through your vehicle. Air will flow through the instrument panel outlets.
Your vehicle’s flow through ventilation system supplies outside air into the vehicle when it’s moving. When the vehicle is not moving, you can get outside air to flow through by selecting any air delivery mode and any fan speed.
3-10
Your vehicle has air outlets that allow you to adjust the direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle.
Move the knob in the center of each outlet up, down or side to side to direct the air from the outlet. Use the control dial in the center to shut the outlet off. For the most efficient airflow and temperature control, keep the shut off door in the fully opened position.
In vehicles equipped with rear seat outlets, you can adjust the airflow toward either seating area, the floor or upward. Move the knob in the center of each outlet in any direction to direct airflow. Increase or reduce the amount of airflow from the upper outlets by adjusting the lever between the two rear vents up or down to the floor outlets.
3-11
Ventilation Tips
D Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow or any other obstruction such as leaves. The heater and defroster will work better, reducing the chance of fogging your windows.
D In cool damp weather, minimize your use of
RECIRC to reduce the chance of fogging your windows.
D When you enter a vehicle with the standard system in cold weather, select FLOOR mode to supply air through the floor outlets. Then turn the fan on high for a few moments before driving away. This will blow moist air from the intake outlets toward the floor, not the windshield. It reduces the chance of fogging your windows. If you have the electronic system, the AUTO setting will do this for you.
Manual operation of the electronic system in the
FLOOR mode will also supply air through the floor outlets.
D Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects. This helps air to circulate throughout your vehicle.
Audio Systems
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily and give years of listening pleasure. You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it first. Find out what your audio system can do and how to operate all its controls, to be sure you’re getting the most out of the advanced engineering that went into it.
Setting the Clock for Systems with Radio
Data System
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears. AM will appear on the display for morning hours. Press and hold MIN until the correct minute appears. The clock may be set with the ignition on or off.
To set the clock to the time of a station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and hold
HR and MIN at the same time until TIME UPDATED appears on the display. If the time is not available from the station, NO UPDATE will appear on the display instead.
3-12
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player with Programmable Equalization and
Radio Data System (RDS) (If Equipped)
Playing the Radio
PWR VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV, your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to select MIN,
MED or MAX. Each choice allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then, as you drive, SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any particular speed.
The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive. If you don’t want to use SCV, select OFF.
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking.
3-13
SCAN: Press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds until the SCAN icon appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use SCAN to listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to a station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning. The sound will mute while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press EQ to select the desired equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return and the equalization that you selected will also be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
PRESET SCAN: Press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for more than four seconds until the PSCAN icon and the preset number appear on the display. You will hear a double beep. Use PRESET SCAN to listen to each of your preset stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning presets.
Note that PRESET SCAN will skip over presets where no station is being received at that time to prevent hearing static.
Setting the Tone
TONE: Press and release this button until the desired tone control (BASS, MID or TREB) is found. The
SELECT LED indicator will light to show that the tone control can be adjusted. When using BASS, MID or
TREB, turn the SELECT knob clockwise to increase.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
Pressing and holding the TONE button for at least two seconds will return all tone settings to flat regardless of tone selected. FLAT will appear on the display.
3-14
EQ: This feature allows you to choose preset bass, mid and treble equalization settings designed for different individual listening tastes. Press EQ to select the desired preset equalization setting. Each time you press EQ, another setting will appear on the display.
You can preset up to six equalization settings. Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Use the TONE button and the SELECT knob to select the desired equalization.
3. Press and hold EQ for two seconds. SELECT EQ # will appear on the display. The EQ icon will flash.
4. Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to select the desired EQ number. Each time you press EQ or turn the SELECT knob, another EQ setting will appear on the display.
5. Press and hold the EQ button or push the SELECT knob to store the equalization preset. You will hear a beep and EQ SAVED will appear on the display.
6. Repeat the steps for each EQ setting.
Note that EQ 5 has been programmed for use with talk radio, but it can be preset to a different tone.
Using RDS Mode
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS mode gives you many useful new features. With RDS, the radio can:
D Seek only to stations with the types of programs you want to listen to,
D seek to stations with traffic announcements,
D receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies, and
D receive and display messages from radio stations.
RDS features are only available for use on FM stations which broadcast RDS information. The RDS features of your radio rely upon receiving specific RDS information from these stations. These features will only work when the RDS information is available. In rare cases, a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, please contact the radio station.
When you are tuned to an RDS station, the station name will appear on the display, instead of the frequency. Most RDS stations provide their station name, the time of day and a Program Type (PTY) for their current programming.
3-15
TRAF: Press this button to receive traffic announcements. The traffic announcement brackets will appear on the display. TRAF will appear on the display if the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop. If no station is found,
NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio station or a related network station, you will hear it, even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing. If the cassette tape or compact disc player was being used, the tape or compact disc will stay in the player and resume play at the point where it stopped.
INFO: If the current station has a message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this button to see the message. If the whole message does not appear on the display, parts of the message will appear every three seconds until the message is completed. To see the parts of the message faster than every three seconds, press this button again. A new group of words will appear on the display. Once the complete message has been displayed,
INFO will disappear from the display until another new message is received.
3-16
PROG TYPE: This button is used to turn on and off
Program Type (PTY) select. The P TYPE icon will appear on the display and the SELECT LED indicator next to the SELECT knob will light. The last selected
PTY will appear on the display for five seconds. Turn the SELECT knob to select the PTY you want to listen to. Press SEEK or SCAN to find radio stations of the
PTY you want to listen to. The last PTY selected will be used for seek or scan modes. If a station with the selected PTY is not found, NOT FOUND will appear on the display. If both PROG TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will search for stations with traffic announcements and the selected PTY.
To use the PROG TYPE interrupt feature, press and hold this button until you hear a beep on the PTY you want to interrupt. An “*” will appear next to the
PTY name, for example CLASSICAL*. When you are listening to a cassette or compact disc, the last selected
RDS FM station will interrupt play if that selected PTY format is broadcast.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite Program Types (PTYs).
These buttons have factory PTY presets. You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Press PROG TYPE, if it is not already on.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1 or FM2.
3. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PROG TYPE.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that numbered button, the PTY you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
ALERT!: This type of announcement warns of national or local emergencies. You will not be able to turn off alert announcements. ALERT! appears on the display when an alert announcement plays. When an alert announcement comes on the tuned radio station, you will hear it, even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing. If the cassette tape or compact disc player is playing, play will stop for the announcement and resume when the announcement is finished.
ALTERNATE FREQUENCY: This feature allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type. Press and hold AM FM for two seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON will appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger stations. Press and hold AM FM again for two seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL FADE: This button adjusts balance and fade.
To adjust balance, press this button until BAL appears on the display. Turn the SELECT knob clockwise for the right speakers and counterclockwise for the left speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. To adjust fade, press this button until FAD appears on the display. Turn the SELECT knob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. Press and hold this button for two seconds to return both fade and balance to the middle position.
3-17
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player. The longer side with the tape visible should face out. If the ignition is on, but the radio is off, the tape can be inserted and will begin playing. If you hear nothing but a garbled sound, the tape may not be in squarely.
Press EJECT to remove the tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, FAD, BAL,
TREB, MID, BASS, EQ, SEEK and SCAN controls just as you do for the radio. The display will show TAPE and an arrow showing which side of the tape is playing. The tape player automatically begins playing the other side when it reaches the end of the tape.
Your tape bias is set automatically when a metal or chrome tape is inserted. If you want to insert a tape when the ignition is off, first press EJECT or the
RCL knob.
If an error appears on the radio display, the tape won’t play because of an error.
TIGHT TAPE is displayed when the tape is tight and the player can’t turn the tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player. Try a new tape to make sure your player is working properly.
BROKEN TAPE is displayed when the tape is broken.
Try a new tape.
WRAPPED TAPE is displayed when the tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem.
FWD (1): Press this button to advance quickly to another part of the tape. Press the button again to return to play. The radio will play the last selected station while the tape advances. You may select stations during
FWD operation by using TUNE.
While in FWD mode the display will show FREQ and
FWD uu. If the radio is playing a RDS station the display will only show FREQ.
3-18
PROG (2): Press this button to play the other side of the tape.
REV (4): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will play the last selected station while the tape reverses.
You may select stations during REV operation by using TUNE.
D (6): Press this button to reduce background noise.
DOLBY NR ON will appear on the display. Press it again to turn Dolby off.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
EQ: Press EQ to select the desired preset equalization setting while playing a cassette. The equalization will be automatically set whenever you play a cassette tape.
SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to search for the next or previous selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for SEEK to work. You can skip nine selections up or down on the tape. Choose how many selections you want to skip. Press the SEEK arrow that many times. The number of selections to be skipped will appear on the display.
SCAN: Press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use SCAN to listen to each selection for a few seconds. The tape will go to the next selection, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press this button again to stop scanning. The sound will mute and SCAN will appear on the display while scanning. The radio will only scan forward.
AM FM: Press this button to play the radio when a tape is in the player. The tape will stop but remain in the player.
TAPE AUX: With a cassette tape in the player and the radio playing, press this button to play a cassette tape.
Press AM FM to return to the radio when a cassette tape is playing. The inactive tape will remain safely inside the radio for future listening. The TAPE icon will appear on the display when a cassette tape is loaded. If you have the optional CD changer and the CD changer is loaded, the TAPE AUX button will activate the changer and an icon will be lit in the display.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio will play. EJECT may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first.
3-19
CLEAN PLAYER: If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned.
It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player.
See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLEAN PLAYER indicator.
The radio will display CLEANED to show the indicator was reset.
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit with your cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature on your tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX button for three seconds. The tape symbol on the display will flash for five seconds and READY will appear on the display, indicating the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will power up the radio and begin playing.
This override routine will remain active until EJECT is pressed.
3-20
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player with Programmable Equalization and
Radio Data System (RDS) (If Equipped)
Playing the Radio
PWR VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV, your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to select MIN,
MED or MAX. Each choice allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then, as you drive, SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any particular speed.
The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive. If you don’t want to use SCV, select OFF.
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn this button to choose radio stations.
SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds until the SCAN icon appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use SCAN to listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to a station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning. The sound will mute while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return and the equalization that you selected will also be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-21
PRESET SCAN: Press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for more than four seconds until the PSCAN icon and the preset number appear on the display. You will hear a double beep. Use PRESET SCAN to listen to each of your preset stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station. PRESET SCAN will only scan the six presets that are in the band selected. Press one of the
SEEK arrows again to stop scanning presets.
Note that PRESET SCAN will skip over presets where no station is being received at that time to prevent hearing static.
Setting the Tone
TONE: Press and release this button until the desired tone control (BASS, MID or TREB) is found. The
SELECT LED indicator will light to show that the tone control can be adjusted. When using BASS or MID, turn the SELECT knob clockwise to increase bass. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease bass. When using TREB, turn the SELECT knob clockwise to increase treble.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
To set all of the tone controls to the middle position, press and hold TONE until FLAT appears on the display.
3-22
EQ: This feature allows you to choose preset bass, mid and treble equalization settings designed for different individual listening tastes. Press EQ to select the desired preset equalization setting. Each time you press EQ, another setting will appear on the display.
You can preset up to six equalization settings. Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Use the TONE button and the SELECT knob to select the desired equalization.
3. Press and hold EQ for two seconds. SELECT EQ # will appear on the display. The EQ icon will flash.
4. Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to select the desired EQ number. Each time you press EQ or turn the SELECT knob, another EQ setting will appear on the display.
5. Press and hold the EQ button or push the SELECT knob to store the equalization preset. You will hear a beep and EQ SAVED will appear on the display.
6. Repeat the steps for each EQ setting.
Note that EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory for use with talk radio, but it can be preset to a different tone.
Using RDS Mode
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS mode gives you many useful new features. With RDS, the radio can:
D Seek only to stations with the types of programs you want to listen to,
D seek to stations with traffic announcements,
D receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies, and
D receive and display messages from radio stations.
RDS features are only available for use on FM stations which broadcast RDS information. The RDS features of your radio rely upon receiving specific RDS information from these stations. These features will only work when the RDS information is available. In rare cases, a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, please contact the radio station.
When you are tuned to an RDS station, the station name will appear on the display, instead of the frequency.
Most RDS stations provide their station name, the time of day and a Program Type (PTY) for their current programming.
TRAF: Press this button to receive traffic announcements. The traffic announcement brackets will appear on the display. TRAF will appear on the display if the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop. If no station is found,
NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio station or a related network station, you will hear it, even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing. If the cassette tape or compact disc player was being used, the tape or compact disc will stay in the player and resume play at the point where it stopped.
INFO: If the current station has a message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this button to see the message. If the whole message does not appear on the display, parts of the message will appear every three seconds until the message is completed. To see the parts of the message faster than every three seconds, press this button again. A new group of words will appear on the display. Once the complete message has been displayed,
INFO will disappear from the display until another new message is received.
3-23
PROG TYPE: This button is used to turn on and off
Program Type (PTY) select. The P TYPE icon will appear on the display and the SELECT LED indicator next to the SELECT knob will light. The last selected
PTY will appear on the display for five seconds. Turn the SELECT knob to select the PTY you want to listen to. Press SEEK or SCAN to find radio stations of the
PTY you want to listen to. The last PTY selected will be used for seek or scan modes. If a station with the selected PTY is not found, NOT FOUND will appear on the display. If both PROG TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will search for stations with traffic announcements and the selected PTY.
To use the PROG TYPE interrupt feature, press and hold this button until you hear a beep on the PTY you want to interrupt. An “*” will appear next to the
PTY name, for example CLASSICAL*. When you are listening to a cassette or compact disc, the last selected
RDS FM station will interrupt play if that selected PTY format is broadcast.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite Program Types (PTYs).
These buttons have factory PTY presets. You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Press PROG TYPE, if it is not already on.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1 or FM2.
3. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PROG TYPE.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that numbered button, the PTY you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
ALERT!: This type of announcement warns of national or local emergencies. You will not be able to turn off alert announcements. ALERT! appears on the display when an alert announcement plays. When an alert announcement comes on the tuned radio station, you will hear it, even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing. If the cassette tape or compact disc player is playing, play will stop for the announcement and resume when the announcement is finished.
3-24
ALTERNATE FREQUENCY: This feature allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type. Press and hold AM FM for two seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON will appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger stations.
Press and hold AM FM again for two seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL FADE: This button adjusts balance and fade.
To adjust balance, press this button until BAL appears on the display. Turn the SELECT knob clockwise for the right speakers and counterclockwise for the left speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. To adjust fade, press this button until FAD appears on the display. Turn the SELECT knob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. Press and hold this button for two seconds to return both fade and balance to the middle position.
Playing a Compact Disc
With the ignition on, insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing. If you want to insert a CD when the ignition is off, first press EJECT or the RCL knob.
Inserting a CD with the radio off and the ignition on will start auto play.
Note that when the disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be displayed. If you select an EQ setting for your CD, it will be activated each time you play a CD.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will appear on the display.
If CHECK CD appears on the radio display and the disc comes out, it could be that:
D The road is too rough. The disc should play when the road is smoother.
D The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
D The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem.
3-25
FWD (1): Press and hold this button to advance quickly within a track. Release it to play the passage. You will hear sound at a reduced volume. The display will show elapsed time.
RDM (3): Press this button to hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM and the track number will appear on the display.
REV (4): Press and hold this button to reverse quickly within a track. Release it to play the passage. You will hear sound at a reduced volume. The display will show elapsed time.
EQ: Press EQ to select the desired preset equalization setting while playing a compact disc. The equalization will be automatically set whenever you play a compact disc.
SEEK: Press the down arrow while playing a CD to go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played. Press the up arrow to go to the next track. If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving backward or forward through the disc.
SCAN: Press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use SCAN to listen to each selection for a few seconds. The disc will go to the next selection, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press this button again to stop scanning.
The sound will mute while scanning. SCAN and the track number will appear on the display.
RCL: Press this button to see how long the current track has been playing. To change what is normally shown on the display (track or elapsed time), press the button until you see the display you want, then hold the button until the display flashes. While elapsed time is showing, CD
TIME will appear on the display.
AM FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc is in the player.
CD AUX: With a compact disc in the player and the radio playing, press this button to play a compact disc.
Press AM FM to return to the radio when a compact disc is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening. The CD icon will appear on the display when a compact disc is loaded.
If you have the optional CD changer and the CD changer is loaded, the CD AUX button will activate the changer and an icon will be lit in the display.
3-26
EJECT: Press this button to remove the disc. The radio will play. EJECT may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first.
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape and
Compact Disc Player with Programmable
Equalization and Radio Data System (RDS)
(If Equipped)
Playing the Radio
PWR VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and off. To increase volume, turn the knob clockwise.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease volume.
SCV: Your system has a feature called
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). With SCV, your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for road and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to select MIN,
MED or MAX. Each choice allows for more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as you drive, SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any particular speed.
The volume level should always sound the same to you as you drive. If you don’t want to use SCV, select OFF.
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM1 and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower station and stay there. The sound will mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds until the SCAN icon appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use SCAN to listen to stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to a station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning. The sound will mute while scanning.
3-27
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that numbered button, the station you set will return and the equalization that you selected will also be automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
PRESET SCAN: Press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for more than four seconds until the PSCAN icon and the preset number appear on the display. You will hear a double beep. Use PRESET SCAN to listen to each of your preset stations for a few seconds. The radio will go to the first preset station stored on your pushbuttons, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station. Press one of the SEEK arrows again to stop scanning presets.
Note that PRESET SCAN will skip over presets where no station is being received at that time to prevent hearing static.
3-28
Setting the Tone
TONE: Press and release this button until the desired tone control (BASS, MID or TREB) is found. The
SELECT LED indicator will light to show that the tone control can be adjusted. When using BASS or MID, turn the SELECT knob clockwise to increase bass. Turn it counterclockwise to decrease bass. When using TREB, turn the SELECT knob clockwise to increase treble.
Turn it counterclockwise to decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
To set all of the tone controls to the middle position, press and hold TONE until FLAT appears on the display.
EQ: This feature allows you to choose preset bass, mid and treble equalization settings designed for different individual listening tastes. Press EQ to select the desired preset equalization setting. Each time you press EQ, another setting will appear on the display.
You can preset up to six equalization settings. Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Use the TONE button and the SELECT knob to select the desired equalization.
3. Press and hold EQ for two seconds. SELECT EQ # will appear on the display. The EQ icon will flash.
4. Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to select the desired EQ number. Each time you press EQ or turn the SELECT knob, another EQ setting will appear on the display.
5. Press and hold the EQ button or push the SELECT knob to store the equalization preset. You will hear a beep and EQ SAVED will appear on the display.
6. Repeat the steps for each EQ setting.
Note that EQ 5 has been programmed for use with talk radio, but it can be preset to a different tone.
Using RDS Mode
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS mode gives you many useful new features. With RDS, the radio can:
D Seek only to stations with the types of programs you want to listen to,
D seek to stations with traffic announcements,
D receive announcements concerning local and national emergencies, and
D receive and display messages from radio stations.
RDS features are only available for use on FM stations which broadcast RDS information. The RDS features of your radio rely upon receiving specific RDS information from these stations. These features will only work when the RDS information is available. In rare cases, a radio station may broadcast incorrect information that will cause the radio features to work improperly. If this happens, please contact the radio station.
When you are tuned to an RDS station, the station name will appear on the display, instead of the frequency. Most RDS stations provide their station name, the time of day and a Program Type (PTY) for their current programming.
3-29
TRAF: Press this button to receive traffic announcements. The traffic announcement brackets will appear on the display. TRAF will appear on the display if the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop. If no station is found,
NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
When a traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio station or a related network station, you will hear it, even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing. If the cassette tape or compact disc player was being used, the tape or compact disc will stay in the player and resume play at the point where it stopped.
INFO: If the current station has a message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this button to see the message. If the whole message does not appear on the display, parts of the message will appear every three seconds until the message is completed. To see the parts of the message faster than every three seconds, press this button again. A new group of words will appear on the display. Once the complete message has been displayed,
INFO will disappear from the display until another new message is received.
3-30
PROG TYPE: This button is used to turn on and off
Program Type (PTY) select. The P TYPE icon will appear on the display and the SELECT LED indicator next to the SELECT knob will light. The last selected
PTY will appear on the display for five seconds. Turn the SELECT knob to select the PTY you want to listen to. Press SEEK or SCAN to find radio stations of the
PTY you want to listen to. The last PTY selected will be used for seek or scan modes. If a station with the selected PTY is not found, NOT FOUND will appear on the display. If both PROG TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will search for stations with traffic announcements and the selected PTY.
To use the PROG TYPE interrupt feature, press and hold this button until you hear a beep on the PTY you want to interrupt. An “*” will appear next to the
PTY name, for example CLASSICAL*. When you are listening to a cassette or compact disc, the last selected
RDS FM station will interrupt play if that selected PTY format is broadcast.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your favorite Program Types (PTYs).
These buttons have factory PTY presets. You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2). Just:
1. Press PROG TYPE, if it is not already on.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1 or FM2.
3. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PROG TYPE.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that numbered button, the PTY you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
ALERT!: This type of announcement warns of national or local emergencies. You will not be able to turn off alert announcements. ALERT! appears on the display when an alert announcement plays. When an alert announcement comes on the tuned radio station, you will hear it, even if the volume is muted or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing. If the cassette tape or compact disc player is playing, play will stop for the announcement and resume when the announcement is finished.
ALTERNATE FREQUENCY: This feature allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the same program type. Press and hold AM FM for two seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON will appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger stations. Press and hold AM FM again for two seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL FADE: This button adjusts balance and fade.
To adjust balance, press this button until BAL appears on the display. Turn the SELECT knob clockwise for the right speakers and counterclockwise for the left speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. To adjust fade, press this button until FAD appears on the display. Turn the SELECT knob clockwise to adjust the sound to the front speakers and counterclockwise for the rear speakers. The middle position balances the sound between the speakers. Press and hold this button for two seconds to return both fade and balance to the middle position.
3-31
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than that are so thin they may not work well in this player. The longer side with the tape visible should face to the right. If the ignition is on, but the radio is off, the tape can be inserted and will begin playing. If you hear nothing but a garbled sound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press EJECT to remove the tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, FAD, BAL,
TREB, MID, BASS, EQ, SEEK and SCAN controls just as you do for the radio. The display will show TAPE and an arrow showing which side of the tape is playing. The tape player automatically begins playing the other side when it reaches the end of the tape.
Your tape bias is set automatically when a metal or chrome tape is inserted. If you want to insert a tape when the ignition is off, first press EJECT or the
RCL knob.
If an error appears on the radio display, the tape won’t play because of an error.
TIGHT TAPE is displayed when the tape is tight and the player can’t turn the tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the open end down and try to turn the right hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your tape may be damaged and should not be used in the player. Try a new tape to make sure your player is working properly.
BROKEN TAPE is displayed when the tape is broken.
Try a new tape.
WRAPPED TAPE is displayed when the tape is wrapped around the tape head. Attempt to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem.
FWD (1): Press this button to advance quickly to another part of the tape. Press the button again to return to playing speed. The radio will play the last selected station while the tape advances. You may select stations during FWD operation by using TUNE.
While in FWD mode the display will show FREQ and
FWD uu. If the radio is playing a RDS station the display will only show FREQ.
3-32
PROG (2): Press this button to play the other side of the tape.
REV (4): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will play the last selected station while the tape reverses.
You may select stations during REV operation by using TUNE.
D (6): Press this button to reduce background noise.
DOLBY NR ON will appear on the display. Press it again to turn Dolby off.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
EQ: Press EQ to select the desired preset equalization setting while playing a cassette. The equalization will be automatically set whenever you play a cassette tape.
SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to search for the next or previous selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for SEEK to work. You can skip nine selections up or down on the tape. Choose how many selections you want to skip. Press the SEEK arrow that many times. The number of selections to be skipped will appear on the display.
SCAN: Press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use SCAN to listen to each selection for a few seconds. The tape will go to the next selection, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press this button again to stop scanning. The sound will mute and SCAN will appear on the display while scanning. The radio will scan in forward only.
AM FM: Press this button to play the radio when a tape is in the player. The tape will stop but remain in the player.
CD TAPE: With a compact disc in the player and the radio playing, press this button to play a compact disc.
Press AM FM to return to the radio when a compact disc is playing. Press CD TAPE to switch between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded. The inactive tape or CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening. The display will show TAPE and CD icons.
If you have the optional CD changer and the CD changer is loaded, the CD TAPE button will activate the changer and an icon will be lit in the display.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape.
The radio will play. EJECT may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first.
3-33
CLEAN PLAYER: If this message appears on the display, the cassette tape player needs to be cleaned.
It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to the tapes and player.
See “Care of Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for five seconds to reset the CLEAN PLAYER indicator.
The radio will display CLEANED to show the indicator was reset.
Playing a Compact Disc
With the ignition on, insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The player will pull it in and the disc should begin playing. If you want to insert a CD when the ignition is off, first press EJECT or the RCL knob.
Inserting a CD with the radio off and the ignition on will start auto play.
Note that when the disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be displayed. If you select an EQ setting for your CD, it will be activated each time you play a CD.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will appear on the display.
If CHECK CD appears on the radio display and the disc comes out, it could be that:
D The road is too rough. The disc should play when the road is smoother.
D The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
D The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error message, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem.
FWD (1): Press and hold this button to advance quickly within a track. Release it to play the passage. You will hear sound at a reduced volume. The display will show elapsed time.
RDM (3): Press this button to hear the tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM and the track number will appear on the display.
3-34
REV (4): Press and hold this button to reverse quickly within a track. Release it to play the passage. You will hear sound at a reduced volume. The display will show elapsed time.
EQ: Press EQ to select the desired preset equalization setting while playing a compact disc. The equalization will be automatically set whenever you play a compact disc.
SEEK: Press the down arrow while playing a CD to go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played. Press the up arrow to go to the next track. If you hold the button or press it more than once, the player will continue moving backward or forward through the disc.
SCAN: Press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use SCAN to listen to each selection for a few seconds. The disc will go to the next selection, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next selection. Press this button again to stop scanning. The sound will mute while scanning. SCAN and the track number will appear on the display.
RCL: Press this button to see how long the current track has been playing. To change what is normally shown on the display (track or elapsed time), press the button until you see the display you want, then hold the button until the display flashes. While elapsed time is showing, CD
TIME will appear on the display.
AM FM: Press this button to play the radio when a disc is in the player.
CD TAPE: With a cassette tape in the player and the radio playing, press this button to play a cassette tape.
Press AM FM to return to the radio when a cassette tape is playing. Press CD TAPE to switch between the tape and compact disc if both are loaded. The inactive tape or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening. The display will show TAPE and CD icons.
If you have the optional CD changer and the CD changer is loaded, the CD TAPE button will activate the changer and an icon will be lit in the display.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the disc. The radio will play. EJECT may be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first.
3-35
Trunk-Mounted CD Changer (Option)
With the optional compact disc changer, you can play up to 12 discs continuously. Normal size discs may be played using the trays supplied in the magazine.
You must first load the magazine with discs before you can play a compact disc. Each of the 12 trays holds one disc. Slide the button on the top of the magazine and pull gently on one of the trays. Load the trays from top to bottom, placing a disc on the tray label side up. If you load a disc label side down, the disc will not play and an error will occur. Gently push the tray back into the magazine slot until it locks into place. Repeat this procedure for loading up to 12 discs in the magazine.
3-36
Once you have loaded the discs in the magazine, slide open the door of the compact disc (CD) changer. Push the magazine into the changer in the direction of the arrow marked on top of the magazine.
Close the door by sliding it all the way to the right.
When the door is closed, the changer will begin checking for discs in the magazine. This will continue for up to one and a half minutes depending on the number of discs loaded.
To eject the magazine from the player, slide the CD changer door all the way open. The magazine will automatically eject. Remember to keep the door closed whenever possible to keep dirt and dust from getting inside the changer.
3-37
All of the CD functions are controlled by the radio buttons except for ejecting the magazine. Whenever a
CD magazine with discs is loaded in the changer and the door is closed, the compact disc symbol will appear on the radio display. If the CD changer is checking the magazine for CDs, the compact disc symbol will flash on the display until the changer is ready to play.
If CD changer mode is entered during initialization,
LOADING will appear on the display. When a CD begins playing, a disc and track number will be displayed. The disc numbers are listed on the front of the magazine.
Compact Disc Changer Errors
If an error appears on the display, an error has occurred and the compact disc temporarily cannot play.
NO CD’S is displayed when the CD changer cartridge is empty. An empty magazine is inserted in the CD changer. Try the magazine again with a disc loaded on one of the trays.
CHECK CD # could be displayed for the following:
D The road is too rough. The disc should play when the road is smoother.
D The disc is dirty, scratched or wet.
D The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and try again.
CD DOOR OPEN is displayed when the CD changer door is left open. Completely close the changer door to restore normal operation.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be corrected, please contact your dealer. If your radio displays an error, write it down and provide it to your dealer when reporting the problem.
Playing a Compact Disc
FWD (1): Press and hold this button to advance quickly within a track. As the CD advances, elapsed time will be displayed to help you find the correct passage.
PROG (2): Press this button to select the next disc in the magazine. Each time you press PROG, the disc number on the radio display will go to that of the next available CD.
3-38
RDM (3): Press this button to enter the multi disc random play mode. RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. The tracks on all the discs will play in random order. Press and hold this button to enter the single disc random play mode. RANDOM ONE will appear on the display and a chime will sound. The tracks on the current disc will play in random order. Press this button again to turn off the random feature and return to normal operation.
REV (4): Press and hold this button to reverse quickly within a track. As the CD reverses, elapsed time will be displayed with a flashing arrow to help you find the correct passage.
(5): Press this button to select the previous disc in the magazine. Each time you press this button, the disc number on the radio display will go to that of the previous available CD.
(6): No function when in CD changer mode.
RCL: Press this button to see how long the current track has been playing. To change what is normally shown on the display (track or elapsed time), press the button until you see the display you want, then hold the button until the display flashes. While elapsed time is showing,
CD TIME will appear on the display.
SEEK: Press the down arrow while playing a CD to go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played. Press the up arrow to go to the next track. If the button is pressed more than once, the player will continue moving backward or forward through the disc.
TRACK SCAN: Press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds until TRACK SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep. You will hear the first few seconds of each track on the current disc. The sound will mute while scanning. The SCAN icon will be lit and the “T” will blink to indicate track scan mode.
Press SEEK again to stop TRACK SCAN.
DISC SCAN: Press and hold one of the SEEK arrows for four seconds until DISC SCAN appears on the display and you hear a double beep. You will hear the first few seconds of track one on each disc. The sound will mute while scanning. The SCAN icon will be lit and the “D” will blink to indicate disc scan mode.
Press SEEK again to stop DISC SCAN.
3-39
Theft
-
Deterrent Feature RDS Radios
THEFTLOCK
R
is designed to discourage theft of your radio. The feature works automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will not operate and LOCKED will be displayed.
With THEFTLOCK activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel.
SEEK: Press the up or down arrow to go to the next higher or lower radio station and stay there.
If a cassette tape is playing, press the up arrow to search for the next selection on the tape. Press the down arrow to search for the previous selection on the tape. Your tape must have at least three seconds of silence between each selection for SEEK to work. If a compact disc is playing, press the up arrow to go to the start of the next track. Press the down arrow to go to the start of the current track if more than eight seconds have played.
If less than eight seconds have played, press the down arrow to go to the previous track.
3-40
AM FM: Press this button to select AM, FM1 or FM2.
The band you select will be displayed. The frequency will also be displayed and, if the station is in stereo, the stereo indicator will also be displayed. If a cassette tape or compact disc is playing, the tape or disc will stop playing and the radio will play.
PRESET: Press this button to hear the radio stations that are set on your pushbuttons. If a cassette tape is playing, press this button to play the other side of the tape. If a compact disc is playing in the CD changer, press this button to select the next loaded disc.
VOL: Press the up or down arrow to increase or decrease volume.
PLAY: Press this button to play a cassette tape or compact disc when the radio is playing.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it again, or any other radio button, to turn on the sound.
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range, however, can cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the sound to come and go.
3-41
Cellular Phone Usage
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with your vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery or simply having the phone “on”. This interference is described as an increased level of static while listening to the radio. If you notice static while listening to the radio, unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noise is almost undetectable until it is too late. Your hearing can adapt to higher volumes of sound. Sound that seems normal can be loud and harmful to your hearing. Take precautions by adjusting the volume control on your radio to a safe sound level before your hearing adapts to it.
To help avoid hearing loss or damage:
D Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
D Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably and clearly.
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your vehicle - like a tape player, CB radio, mobile telephone or two way radio - be sure you can add what you want. If you can, it’s very important to do it properly. Added sound equipment may interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, Delphi Delco Electronics radio or other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation of sound equipment that has been added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with your dealer and be sure to check Federal rules covering mobile radio and telephone units.
3-42
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN
PLAYER to indicate that you have used your tape player for 50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer. If this message appears on the display, your cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette to see if it is the tape or the tape player at fault. If this other cassette has no improvement in sound quality, clean the tape player.
The recommended cleaning method for your cassette tape player is the use of a scrubbing action, non abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available through your dealership (GM Part No. 12344789).
You may also choose a non scrubbing action, wet type cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not eject on its own. A non scrubbing action cleaner may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non scrubbing action, dry type cleaning cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and hold EJECT for two seconds to reset the CLEAN PLAYER indicator.
The radio will display CLEANED to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette tape is in good condition before you have your tape player serviced.
Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
3-43
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Diversity Antenna System
Your AM FM antennas are located in the front windshield and rear window. Be sure that the inside surfaces of the front windshield and rear window are not scratched and that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the inside surfaces are damaged, they could interfere with radio reception.
NOTICE:
Do not try to clear frost or other material from the inside of the rear window with a razor blade or anything else that is sharp. This may damage the rear defogger grid and affect your radio’s ability to pick up stations clearly. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
If, when you turn on your rear window defogger, you hear static on your radio station, it could mean that a defogger grid line has been damaged. If this is true, the grid line must be repaired.
If you choose to add an aftermarket cellular telephone to your vehicle, and the antenna needs to be attached to the glass, be sure that you do not damage the grid lines for the AM FM antennas or place the cellular telephone antenna over the grid lines.
Chime Level Adjustment
The volume level of the vehicle’s chimes can be controlled by the radio. To change the volume level, press and hold pushbutton six with the ignition on and the radio power off. The chime volume level will change from the normal level to loud, and LOUD will be displayed on the radio. To change back to the default or normal setting, press and hold pushbutton six again.
The chime level will change from the loud level to normal, and NORMAL will be displayed.
3-44
Section 4 Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather conditions. We’ve also included many other useful tips on driving.
9 Traction Control System (If Equipped)
4 17 Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
4 22 Before Leaving on a Long Trip
4 30 Recreational Vehicle Towing
4-
4-1
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your vehicle: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear end collisions are about the most preventable of accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver, in both city and rural driving. You never know when the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving task - such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on the floor - makes proper defensive driving more difficult and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place to do them yourself.
These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life.
4-2
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
D Judgment
D Muscular Coordination
D Vision
D Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor vehicle related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking and driving. In recent years, over 17,000 annual motor vehicle related deaths have been associated with the use of alcohol, with more than 300,000 people injured.
Many adults - by some estimates, nearly half the adult population - choose never to drink alcohol, so they never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to solve the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too much” if the driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might think. Although it depends on each person and situation, here is some general information on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone who is drinking depends upon four things:
D The amount of alcohol consumed
D The drinker’s body weight
D The amount of food that is consumed before and during drinking
D The length of time it has taken the drinker to consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180 lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
4-3
4-4
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food just before or during drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally have a lower relative percentage of body water than men.
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same body weight when each has the same number of drinks.
The law in many U.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC of 0.10 percent. In a growing number of U.S. states, and throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some other countries, it’s even lower. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold showers will speed that up. “I’ll be careful” isn’t the right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
There’s something else about drinking and driving that many people don’t know. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord or heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking - driver or passenger - is in a crash, that person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious - or even fatal - collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you’re with a group, designate a driver who will not drink.
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second.
But that’s only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping enough space between your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy); tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose control of your vehicle. (Also see “Traction Control System” in the Index.)
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts - heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking - rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti lock brakes (ABS). ABS is an advanced electronic braking system that will help prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive away, your anti lock brake system will check itself.
You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test is going on, and you may even notice that your brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
United States Canada
If there’s a problem with the anti lock brake system, this warning light will stay on. See “Anti Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in the Index.
4-7
The anti lock system can change the brake pressure faster than any driver could. The computer is programmed to make the most of available tire and road conditions.
Here’s how anti lock works. Let’s say the road is wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animal jumps out in front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels.
You can steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
4-8
Remember: Anti lock doesn’t change the time you need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you, you won’t have time to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even though you have anti lock brakes.
Using Anti
-
Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down firmly and let anti lock work for you. You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise, but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti lock, you can steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more than even the very best braking.
Traction Control System
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have a traction control system that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it senses that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the system works the front brakes and reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will automatically disengage. When road conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may reengage the cruise control. (See “Cruise Control” in the Index.)
This light should come on briefly when you start the engine. If it stays on or comes on while you are driving, there’s a problem with your traction control system.
4-9
See “Traction Control System Warning Light” in the
Index. When this warning light is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system automatically comes on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you should always leave the system on. But you can turn the traction control system off if you ever need to.
(You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow. See “Rocking Your
Vehicle” in the Index.)
To turn the system off, press the TRACTION
CONTROL button located on the console next to the gear shift selector.
The traction control system warning light in the instrument cluster will come on and stay on. If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press the button, the warning light will come on - but the system won’t turn off right away. It will wait until there’s no longer a current need to limit wheel spin.
You can turn the system back on at any time by pressing the button again. The traction control system warning light should go off.
The switch indicator light should go back on.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but it will take much more effort.
Magnetic-Speed Variable Assist (Option)
Your vehicle may have this optional steering system that continuously adjusts the effort you feel when steering at all vehicle speeds. It provides ease when parking, yet a firm, solid feel at highway speeds.
4-10
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to the same laws of physics when driving on curves. The traction of the tires against the road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and your speed.
While you’re in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control systems - steering and acceleration - have to do their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those places. You can lose control. Refer to “Traction
Control” in the Index.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Stabilitrak
R
System, the LOW TRAC light may come on to indicate the system is engaged. See “Low Traction Active
(LOW TRAC) Light” in the Index.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are based on good weather and road conditions. Under less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-11
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can avoid these problems by braking - if you can stop in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action - steering around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First apply your brakes. (See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to remove as much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-12
Off
-
Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
You can turn the steering wheel up to one quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a two lane highway waits for just the right moment, accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two lane highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the worst of all traffic accidents - the head on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
D “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to crossroads for situations that might affect your passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait for a better time.
D Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken center line usually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or a double solid line, even if the road seems empty of approaching traffic.
4-13
D Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing, following too closely reduces your area of vision, especially if you’re following a larger vehicle.
Also, you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a reasonable distance.
D When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up, start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be increasing speed as the time comes to move into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes up for the distance you would lose by dropping back. And if something happens to cause you to cancel your pass, you need only slow down and drop back again and wait for another opportunity.
D If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over your shoulder and check the blind spot.
D Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and start your left lane change signal before moving out of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal and move back into the right lane. (Remember that your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther away from you than it really is.)
D Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on two lane roads. Reconsider before passing the next vehicle.
D Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may be slowing down or starting to turn.
D If you’re being passed, make it easy for the following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you can ease a little to the right.
4-14
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving” those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If you have the traction control system, remember:
It helps avoid only the acceleration skid.
If you do not have traction control, or if the system is off, then an acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a second skid if it occurs.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Stabilitrak
R
System, the LOW TRAC light may come on. See “Low
Traction Active (LOW TRAC) Light” in the Index.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice, gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues - such as enough water, ice or packed snow on the road to make a “mirrored surface” - and slow down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti lock brake system (ABS) helps avoid only the braking skid.
4-15
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be impaired - by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
D Drive defensively.
D Don’t drink and drive.
D Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare from headlamps behind you.
D Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles.
D Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
D In remote areas, watch for animals.
D If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But as we get older these differences increase. A 50 year old driver may require at least twice as much light to see the same thing at night as a 20 year old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot of things invisible.
4-16
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle clean - inside and out. Glare at night is made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would, making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night blindness - the inability to see in dim light - and aren’t even aware of it.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because your tire to road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-17
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road and even people walking.
It’s wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going through some car washes can cause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles.
But if you can’t, try to slow down before you hit them.
CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until your brakes work normally.
4-18
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up under your tires that they can actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing on the road. If you can see reflections from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
NOTICE:
If you drive too quickly through deep puddles or standing water, water can come in through your engine’s air intake and badly damage your engine. Never drive through water that is slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you can’t avoid deep puddles or standing water, drive through them very slowly.
4-19
Driving Through Flowing Water
CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can be carried away. As little as six inches of flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If this happens, you and other vehicle occupants could drown. Don’t ignore police warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
D Besides slowing down, allow some extra following distance. And be especially careful when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted by road spray.
D Have good tires with proper tread depth.
(See “Tires” in the Index.)
4-20
City Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch out for what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to traffic signals.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
D Know the best way to get to where you are going.
Get a city map and plan your trip into an unknown part of the city just as you would for a cross country trip.
D Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most large cities. You’ll save time and energy.
(See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
D Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic light is there because the corner is busy enough to need it.
When a light turns green, and just before you start to move, check both ways for vehicles that have not cleared the intersection or may be running the red light.
Freeway Driving
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
4-21
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too fast or too slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in your
“blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower than you actually are.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you must start when you’re not fresh - such as after a day’s work - don’t plan to make too many miles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
Pontiac dealerships all across North America.
They’ll be ready and willing to help if you need it.
4-22
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
D Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
D Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
D Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked all levels?
D Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
D Tires: They are vitally important to a safe, trouble free trip. Is the tread good enough for long distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the recommended pressure?
D Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook along your route? Should you delay your trip a short time to avoid a major storm system?
D Maps: Do you have up to date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less than a second, and you could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
D Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a comfortably cool interior.
D Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your instruments frequently.
D If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest, service or parking area and take a nap, get some exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
4-23
Hill and Mountain Roads
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from driving in flat or rolling terrain.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.
D Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and transaxle. These parts can work hard on mountain roads.
D Know how to go down hills. The most important thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go down a steep or long hill.
CAUTION:
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let your engine assist your brakes on a steep downhill slope.
4-24
CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have to do all the work of slowing down. They could get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Always have your engine running and your vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
D Know how to go uphill. Drive in the highest gear possible.
D Stay in your own lane when driving on two lane roads in hills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
D As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident.
D You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or no passing zones, a falling rocks area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
4-25
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
D Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
D You may want to put winter emergency supplies in your trunk.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.
4-26
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be very careful.
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can be even more trouble because it may offer the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it’s about freezing (32
_F; 0_C) and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
Whatever the condition blowing or loose snow
- smooth ice, packed,
- drive with caution.
If you have traction control, keep the system on.
It will improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a slippery road. Even though your vehicle has a traction control system, you’ll want to slow down and adjust your driving to the road conditions.
See “Traction Control System” in the Index.
If you don’t have the traction control system, accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more.
4-27
Your anti lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a slippery road. Even though you have the anti lock braking system, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement. See “Anti Lock” in the Index.
D Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
D Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when the surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a serious situation. You should probably stay with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
D Turn on your hazard flashers.
4-28
D Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that you’ve been stopped by the snow.
D Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats - anything you can wrap around yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you. You can’t see it or smell it, so you might not know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around again from time to time to be sure snow doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a well charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-29
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until help comes.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all four wheels on the ground. If your vehicle must be towed, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
Loading Your Vehicle
NOTICE:
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground will damage drivetrain components.
Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry. The Tire Loading Information label found on the rear edge of the driver’s door tells you the proper size, speed rating and recommended inflation pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also gives you important information about the number of people that can be in your vehicle and the total weight that you can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo and all nonfactory installed options.
4-30
CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.
The other label is the Certification label, found on the rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
NOTICE:
Your warranty does not cover parts or components that fail because of overloading
If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else, they will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
4-31
CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.
D Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
D Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats.
D Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle.
D When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Electronic Level Control
This feature keeps the rear of your vehicle level as the load changes. It is automatic - you do not need to adjust anything.
Towing a Trailer
CAUTION:
If you don’t use the correct equipment and drive properly, you can lose control when you pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not work well - or even at all. You and your passengers could be seriously injured.
You may also damage your vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Pull a trailer only if you have followed all the steps in this section. Ask your dealer for advice and information about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section. But trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
4-32
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of your passengers. So please read this section carefully before you pull a trailer.
Load pulling components such as the engine, transaxle, wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder against the drag of the added weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more, the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
D There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for this information can be state or provincial police.
D Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.
D Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.
D Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
D Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed for trailers (or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h)) to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
D the weight of the trailer,
D the weight of the trailer tongue
D and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
4-33
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig.
For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or advice, or you can write us at:
Customer Assistance Center
Pontiac GMC Division
P.O. Box 436008
Pontiac, MI 48343 6008
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. And if you tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index for more information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
4-34
If you’re using a weight carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B). If you have a weight distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to get them right simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or see “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch. Here are some rules to follow:
D The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other bumper type hitches to it. Use only a frame mounted hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
D Will you have to make any holes in the body of your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in the Index).
Dirt and water can, too.
4-35
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough slack so you can turn with your rig.
And, never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust and maintain them properly.
Because you have anti lock brakes, do not try to tap into your vehicles brake system. If you do, both brake systems won’t work well, or at all.
Trailer Wiring Harness
All of the electrical circuits required for your trailer lighting system can be accessed at the driver’s side rear lamp connector. This connector is located under the carpet on the rear corner of your trunk compartment.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector, lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes are still working.
4-36
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer. This can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.
Making Turns
NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could cause the trailer to come in contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check with your dealer. All of the electrical circuits required for your trailer lighting system can be accessed at the left rear lamp connector. This connector is located under the carpet on the driver’s side in the rear corner of your trunk compartment. The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
4-37
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.
Your vehicle has bulb warning lights. When you plug a trailer lighting system into your vehicle’s lighting system, its bulb warning lights may not let you know if one of your lamps goes out. So, when you have a trailer lighting system plugged in, be sure to check your vehicle and trailer lamps from time to time to be sure they’re all working. Once you disconnect the trailer lamps, the bulb warning lights again can tell you if one of your vehicle lamps is out.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
Parking on Hills
CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-38
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while you:
D Start your engine;
D Shift into a gear; and
D Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more on this. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and brake system.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review this information before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during severe operating conditions. See “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
4-39
Section 5 Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
32 If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
5-
5-1
Hazard Warning Flashers
Press this button in to make your front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They also let police know you have a problem. Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
To turn off the flashers, push the button again.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind your vehicle.
5-2
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. But please follow the steps listed to do it safely.
You will not see the battery under the hood of your vehicle, since it is located under the rear seat on the passenger’s side.
CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because:
D They contain acid that can burn you.
D They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
D They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you.
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
The ACDelco
R
battery in your vehicle has a built in hydrometer. Do not charge, test or jump start the battery if the hydrometer looks clear or light yellow. Replace the battery when there is a clear or light yellow hydrometer and a cranking complaint.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12 volt battery with a negative ground system.
NOTICE:
If the other system isn’t a 12 volt system with a negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
5-3
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching each other. If they are, it could cause a ground connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in the jump start procedure. Put your automatic transaxle in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter. Turn off all lamps that aren’t needed as well as radios. This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. In addition, it could save your radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the battery on the other vehicle and the remote positive (+) terminal, located on the passenger’s side of the engine, on your vehicle. Find the positive (+) and negative ( ) terminals on the battery in the other vehicle.
You do not need to access your vehicle’s battery
(which is under the rear seat) for jump starting.
The remote positive (+) terminal is for this purpose.
CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.
NOTICE:
If you leave your radio on, it could be badly damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
5-4
Start by lifting and moving the red positive (+) remote terminal cover away from the relay center.
CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You don’t need to add water to the ACDelco
R
battery installed in every new GM vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water and get medical help immediately.
5-5
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could also be damaged.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to positive (+) and negative ( ) will go to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or a body metal surface.
Don’t connect positive (+) to negative ( ) or you’ll get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts, too. Also, don’t connect the negative ( ) cable to the negative ( ) terminal on the dead battery.
CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts once the engine is running.
5-6
6. Connect the red positive
(+) cable to the remote positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery.
7. Don’t let the other end of the cable touch metal.
Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative ( ) cable to the good battery’s negative ( ) terminal.
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative ( ) cable doesn’t go to the dead battery.
5-7
It goes to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part on the vehicle with the dead battery.
9. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while.
10. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs service.
11. Remove the cables in reverse order to prevent electrical shorting. Take care that they don’t touch each other or any other metal. Replace the red positive (+) remote terminal cover to its original position.
Removal Procedure
A. Remote Positive (+) Terminal
B. Good Battery
C. Windshield Washer Bottle Stud (not shown in picture - located on the passenger’s side corner of the engine compartment)
5-8
Towing Your Vehicle
CAUTION:
To help avoid serious personal injury to you or others:
D Never let passengers ride in a vehicle that is being towed.
D Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.
D Never tow with damaged parts not fully secured.
D Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by the tow truck.
D Always secure the vehicle on each side with separate safety chains when towing it.
D Use only the correct hooks.
NOTICE:
Use the proper towing equipment to avoid damage to the bumper, fascia or fog lamp areas of the vehicle.
With current trends in automotive styles and design, it is essential that the correct towing equipment is used to tow a vehicle. Your vehicle can be towed with wheel lift or car carrier equipment.
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if you need to have your vehicle towed. See “Roadside
Assistance” in the Index.
5-9
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage or a DIC warning message about a hot engine on your vehicle’s instrument panel. See “Coolant Temperature Gage” and
“DIC Warnings and Messages” in the Index.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop your engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool.
NOTICE:
If your engine catches fire because you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
5-10
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
D Climb a long hill on a hot day.
D Stop after high speed driving.
D Idle for long periods in traffic.
D Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan speed and open the window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the highest gear while driving
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) or THIRD (3).
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, idle the engine for three minutes while you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of the
vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service help right away.
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what you’ll see:
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
5-11
CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling, don’t do anything else until it cools down.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD mark (if the engine is hot, the coolant level should be at FULL HOT). If it isn’t, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in the cooling system.
CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
NOTICE:
Engine damage from running your engine without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
5-12
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you use only DEX COOL
R
(silicate free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine coolant will require change sooner - at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL
R
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should be running.
If they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level isn’t at the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX COOL
R
engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index for more information.)
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX COOL
R
coolant.
5-13
NOTICE:
In cold weather, water can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper coolant mixture.
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system is cool before you do it.
5-14
CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator pressure cap - even a little - they can come out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
5-15
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
5-16
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX COOL
R coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler neck.
(See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more information about the proper coolant mixture.)
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the
FULL COLD mark.
5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank, but leave the radiator pressure cap off.
5-17
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine cooling fans.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper DEX COOL
R
coolant mixture through the filler neck until the level reaches the base of the filler neck.
8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure the arrows on the pressure cap line up like this.
5-18
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving, especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you’d use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to a stop - well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard warning flashers.
CAUTION:
Changing a tire can cause an injury. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you or other people. You and they could be badly injured.
Find a level place to change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine.
To be even more certain the vehicle won’t move, you can put blocks at the front and rear of the tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire on the other side of the vehicle, at the opposite end.
5-19
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and change a tire.
The equipment you’ll need is in the trunk.
1. Pull the carpeting from the floor of the trunk.
2. Remove the retainer then lift and remove the cover.
3. Remove the spare tire. See “Compact Spare Tire” later in this section for more information about the compact spare.
4. Unscrew the wing nuts to remove the container that holds the wrench and jack.
5. Remove the wheel wrench, jack and the spare tire from the trunk.
5-20
Removing Wheel Covers and Wheel
Nut Caps
If you have steel wheels with full plastic wheel covers, loosen each nut cap using the wheel wrench.
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) and wheel wrench (B).
Please note that nut caps will not remove from the cover completely.
Gently pry the wheel cover off using the flat end of the wheel wrench.
5-21
5-22
If you have aluminum wheels with plastic nut caps, loosen and remove them using the wheel wrench.
If you have aluminum wheels and a center cover hides the wheel nuts, remove the center cover by using the flat end of the wrench to pry it off.
Do not drop the cover or lay it face down, as it could become scratched or damaged. Do not use a hammer or mallet on this type of cover.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
1. Use the wheel wrench to loosen the wheel nuts, but don’t remove them.
2. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the jack lift head until it fits under the vehicle.
5-23
CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
3. Put the jack head into a notch in the frame which is located near each wheel well. The front notch is
11 inches (28 cm) back from the front wheel well.
The rear notch is 3.5 inches (9 cm) forward from the rear wheel well.
CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle.
5-24
6. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces and spare wheel.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit.
5. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from the places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
5-25
CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious accident.
7. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel mounting surface.
8. Then reinstall the wheel nuts with rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
Make sure each wheel bolt is centered in each wheel hole while tightening the nuts. Tighten each nut by hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
5-26
10. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence.
CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident.
Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to
100 lb ft (140 N·m).
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque specification.
Don’t try to put the wheel cover on the compact spare tire. It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover in the trunk until you have replaced the compact spare tire with a regular tire.
NOTICE:
Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact spare.
If you try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
When you reinstall the full size wheel and tire, you install the wheel cover or nut caps at this point.
5-27
When reinstalling the full plastic wheel cover, align the valve stem with the opening.
When reinstalling the nut caps on aluminum wheels, tighten the caps snug with the wheel wrench.
Start the nut cap by pushing it onto the lug nut with the wheel wrench. Tighten the nut caps snug using the wheel wrench. Then continue tightening one quarter turn. Do not overtighten.
Then continue tightening one quarter turn for plastic caps, or one eighth turn for steel caps.
Do not overtighten.
5-28
When reinstalling the center cover, do not use a hammer or mallet, as they could damage the cover.
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.
After you’ve put the compact spare tire on your vehicle, you’ll need to store the flat tire in your trunk.
Store the flat tire as far forward in the trunk as possible.
Store the jack and wheel wrench in their compartment in the trunk. For storage, the jack must be raised until the screw end is flush with the edge of the jack.
5-29
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place.
The compact spare is for temporary use only. Replace the compact spare tire with a full size tire as soon as you can. See “Compact Spare Tire” later in this section.
See the storing instructions label to replace your compact spare into your trunk properly.
5-30
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle, you should stop as soon as possible and make sure your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have your full size tire repaired or replaced where you want. You must calibrate the Check Tire Pressure System after installing or removing the compact spare. See “Check Tire Pressure
System” in the Index. Of course, it’s best to replace your spare with a full size tire as soon as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in good shape in case you need it again.
NOTICE:
When the compact spare is installed, don’t take your vehicle through an automatic vehicle wash with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel together.
NOTICE:
Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using them can damage your vehicle and can damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on your compact spare.
5-31
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must use caution.
CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an engine compartment fire or other damage. When you’re stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
NOTICE:
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back and forth, you can destroy your transaxle.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle, see “Tire Chains” in the Index.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will clear the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle has traction control, you should turn the system off.
(See “Traction Control System” in the Index.) Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible.
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out, see “Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
5-32
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information, and then it shows how to check important fluid and lubricant levels. There is also technical information about your vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
8 Checking Things Under the Hood
11 Supercharged Engine (If Equipped)
6 16 Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
6 19 Automatic Transaxle Fluid
6 41 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
6 52 Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
6 55 Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
6 57 Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome Plated
6 59 GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
6 60 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
6 64 Removing the Rear Seat Cushion
6 69 Capacities and Specifications
6 70 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
6-
6-1
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer for all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts and
GM trained and supported service people.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much more about how to service your vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper service manual, see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see “Servicing Your Air
Bag Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work you perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
6-2
CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle without knowing enough about it.
D Be sure you have sufficient knowledge, experience, the proper replacement parts and tools before you attempt any vehicle maintenance task.
D Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and other fasteners. “English” and “metric” fasteners can be easily confused. If you use the wrong fasteners, parts can later break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check with your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number
(VIN) shows the code letter for your engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of your instrument panel.
(See “Vehicle Identification Number” in the Index.)
If you have the 3800 V6 engine (VIN Code K), use regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher.
If you’re using fuel rated at the recommended octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service. But don’t worry if you hear a little pinging noise when you’re accelerating or driving up a hill.
That’s normal, and you don’t have to buy a higher octane fuel to get rid of pinging. It’s the heavy, constant knock that means you have a problem.
If you have the 3800 Supercharged V6 engine
(VIN Code 1), use premium unleaded gasoline rated at
91 octane or higher. With the 3800 Supercharged engine, in an emergency, you may be able to use a lower octane - as low as 87 - if heavy knocking does not occur. If you are using 91 or higher octane unleaded gasoline and you hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
6-3
It is recommended that the gasoline meet specifications which have been developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association (AAMA) and endorsed by the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better vehicle performance and engine protection.
Gasolines meeting the AAMA specification could provide improved driveability and emission control system performance compared to other gasolines.
Be sure the posted octane for premium is at least 91
(at least 87 for regular). If the octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive.
If it’s bad enough, it can damage your engine.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood emission control label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. If such fuels are not available in states adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but emission control system performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your vehicle may fail a smog check test. (See “Malfunction Indicator
Lamp” in the Index.) If this occurs, return to your authorized Pontiac dealer for diagnosis to determine the cause of failure. In the event it is determined that the cause of the condition is the type of fuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.
6-4
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low emissions may contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask your service station operator whether or not the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does not recommend the use of such gasolines. If fuels containing
MMT are used, spark plug life may be reduced and your emission control system performance may be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized Pontiac dealer for service.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that will help prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel system, allowing your emission control system to function properly. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Filling Your Tank
NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under your warranty.
CAUTION:
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from gasoline.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the United
States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or contact a major oil company that does business in the country where you’ll be driving.
You can also write us at the following address for advice. Just tell us where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
The cap is behind a hinged door on the driver’s side of your vehicle.
6-5
While refueling, hang the tethered cap on the hook on the inside of the fuel door.
To remove the cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise). The cap has a spring in it; if you let go of the cap too soon, it will spring back to the right.
CAUTION:
If you get gasoline on yourself and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out on you if you open the fuel filler cap too quickly. This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” in the Index.
When you put the cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index.
6-6
NOTICE:
If you need a new cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and your fuel tank and emissions system may be damaged. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the Index.
Fuel Door Lock (Option)
On models equipped with the theft deterrent system, the fuel door is locked and unlocked together with the driver’s power door lock. Therefore, to unlock the fuel filler door, you may use the inside power door lock button or the remote keyless entry transmitter
(if equipped). To unlock the fuel door, unlock the driver’s door.
If your vehicle has a fuel door lock, the fuel door can be opened manually in case of an electrical power failure.
Open the trunk. The release mechanism is on the driver’s side of the vehicle, at the top of the trunk compartment. Pull the tab to release the fuel door.
NOTICE:
Prying on a locked fuel filler door can damage it.
Use the remote fuel door manual release located in the trunk.
6-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned and your vehicle damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
D Dispense gasoline only into approved containers.
D Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or on any surface other than the ground.
D Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete.
D Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
Checking Things Under the Hood
The following sections tell you how to check fluids, lubricants and important underhood parts.
CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan.
CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liquids like gasoline, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
6-8
Hood Release
1. To open the hood, first pull the hood release handle inside the vehicle.
It is next to the parking brake pedal near the floor.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push up on the secondary hood release.
3. Lift the hood.
4. Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
6-9
3800 V6 Series II Engine (L36)
When you open the hood on the 3800 (L36) engine, here’s what you will see (3800 Supercharged (L67) engine similar):
A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Power Steering Fluid
C. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick
D. Brake Master Cylinder
E. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
6-10
F. Radiator Pressure Cap
G. Engine Oil Dipstick
H. Engine Oil Fill Cap
I. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Supercharged Engine (If Equipped)
Your vehicle may have a 3800 V6 (L67) Supercharged engine. The supercharger is a device designed to pump more air into the engine than it would normally use.
This air, mixed with fuel, creates increased engine power. Since the supercharger is a pump and is driven from an engine accessory drive belt, increased pressure is available at all driving conditions.
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) works with a vacuum control to regulate the increased pressure required during specific driving conditions. When this increased pressure or boost is not desired, such as during idling and light throttle cruising, the excess air that the supercharger is pumping is routed through a bypass. All of these controls, working together, provide high performance character and fuel efficiency in the 3800 V6 Supercharged engine.
Engine Oil
If the OIL LEVEL LOW message appears on the DIC, or the CHECK OIL LEVEL light appears on the instrument panel, it means you need to check your engine oil level right away.
For more information, see “Check Oil Level Light” or
“DIC Warnings and Messages” in the Index.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is an added reminder.
Checking Engine Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick is located behind the engine fans and in front of the engine oil fill cap. The top of the dipstick is a round yellow loop.
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
6-11
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the ADD mark, then you’ll need to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the right kind. This part explains what kind of oil to use.
For crankcase capacity, see “Capacities and
Specifications” in the Index.
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil. If your engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross hatched area that shows the proper operating range, your engine could be damaged.
Add engine oil at the engine oil fill cap near the oil dipstick.
Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when you’re through.
6-12
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by looking for the starburst symbol.
This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol.
If you change your own oil, be sure you use oil that has the starburst symbol on the front of the oil container. If you have your oil changed for you, be sure the oil put into your engine is
American Petroleum
Institute certified for gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your vehicle, as shown in the following chart:
6-13
As shown in the chart, SAE 10W 30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can use SAE 5W 30 if it’s going to be colder than 60
_F (16_C) before your next oil change. When it’s very cold, you should use SAE
5W 30. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils, such as SAE 20W 50.
NOTICE:
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended oil can result in engine damage not covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench
R
oil meets all the requirements for your vehicle.
If you are in an area where the temperature falls below
20
_F ( 29
_C), consider using either an SAE 5W 30 synthetic oil or an SAE 0W 30 oil. Both will provide easier cold starting and better protection for your engine at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. The recommended oils with the starburst symbol are all you will need for good performance and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil (Vehicles
Without the GM Oil Life System
t)
If any one of these is true for you, use the short trip/city maintenance schedule:
D Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing.
D Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent driving in stop and go traffic).
D Most trips are through dusty areas.
D You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of your vehicle.
D The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to break down sooner. If any one of these is true for your vehicle, then you need to change your oil and filter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months - whichever occurs first.
6-14
If none of them is true, use the long trip/highway maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months - whichever occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower.
When to Change Engine Oil (Vehicles With the GM Oil Life System
t Option)
If so equipped, your vehicle has a computer that lets you know when to change your engine oil. This is not based on mileage, but on engine revolutions and engine operating temperature. When the computer has calculated that the oil needs changing, the GM Oil Life
System t will indicate that a change is necessary.
The mileage between oil and filter changes will vary depending on how you drive your vehicle - usually between 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and 7,500 miles
(12 500 km) since your last oil and filter change.
Under severe conditions, the system may come on before 3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive your vehicle more than 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months
(whichever occurs first) without an oil change.
The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So, if you drive in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil and filter every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner. Remember to reset the Oil Life System whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Oil Life System (If Equipped)
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Oil Life
System, press and hold the RESET button for more than five seconds while the OIL LIFE is being displayed on the DIC. The oil life will change to 100%.
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that used engine oil contains certain elements that may be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer? Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properly throw away clothing or rags containing used engine oil.
(See the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.)
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you change your own oil, be sure to drain all free flowing oil from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place that collects used oil.
If you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center for help.
6-15
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The air cleaner/filter is on the driver’s side of the engine compartment. To check or replace the air cleaner/filter:
3. Pull out the filter.
4. Replace the air filter and make sure the filter cover tabs position through the slots in the housing.
A notch on the sides of the filter cover will indicate the correct engagement.
5. Fasten the two clips on the top of the housing when you are finished.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when to replace the air filter.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
1. Loosen the two clips on top of the air cleaner housing and lift the filter cover tabs out of the housing.
2. Push the filter housing cover toward the engine, compressing the hose.
CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Don’t drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
6-16
NOTICE:
If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get into your engine, which will damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you’re driving.
The particle filter is located under a removeable panel located at the base of the windshield on the passenger’s side.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle has this feature, the outside air entering the vehicle is routed through a filter. The filter removes certain particles from the air, including pollen and dust particles. Reductions in airflow, which may occur more quickly in dusty areas, indicate that the filter needs to be replaced early.
The filter should be replaced as part of the routine scheduled maintenance. See “Maintenance Schedule” in the Index for replacement intervals. See your dealer for details on changing the filter.
Once you remove your filter, if you choose not to replace it, it will not damage your vehicle. However, the air will no longer be filtered.
6-17
Supercharger Oil
Unless you are technically qualified and have the proper tools, you should let your dealer or a qualified service center perform this maintenance.
How to Check and Add Oil
Check oil only when the engine is cold. Allow the engine to cool two to three hours after running.
CAUTION:
If you remove the supercharger oil fill plug while the engine is hot, pressure may cause hot oil to blow out of the oil fill hole. You may be burned.
Do not remove the plug until the engine cools.
When to Check
Check oil level every 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or every
36 months, whichever occurs first.
What Kind of Oil to Use
Use only the recommended supercharger oil. See
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
1. Clean the area around the oil fill plug before removing it.
2. Remove the oil fill plug using a 3/16 inch
Allen wrench.
3. The oil level is correct when it just reaches the bottom of the threads of the inspection hole.
4. Replace the oil plug with the O ring in place.
Torque to 88 lb in (10 N·m).
6-18
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
D In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90
_F (32_C) or higher.
D In hilly or mountainous terrain.
D When doing frequent trailer towing.
D Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid and filter at
100,000 miles (166 000 km).
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may choose to have this done at the dealership service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transaxle fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle fluid level if you have been driving:
D When outside temperatures are above 90_F (32_C).
D At high speed for quite a while.
D In heavy traffic - especially in hot weather.
D While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal operating temperature, which is 180
_F to
200
_F (82_C to 93_C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50
_F
(10
_C). If it’s colder than 50_F (10_C), you may have to drive longer.
6-19
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
D Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine running.
D With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever in PARK (P).
D With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift lever through each gear range, pausing for about three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).
D Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The transaxle fluid dipstick top is a round, red loop and is located next to the brake master cylinder behind the engine block.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull it back out again.
6-20
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the cross hatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transaxle fluid to use. See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level into the cross hatched area on the dipstick.
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long neck funnel, add enough fluid at the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
NOTICE:
We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON
R
III, because fluid with that label is made especially for your automatic transaxle.
Damage caused by fluid other than
DEXRON
R
III is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as described under “How to Check.”
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the dipstick back in all the way.
6-21
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX COOL
R
engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX COOL
R
extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with engine overheating, see “Engine Overheating” in the Index.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX COOL
R
coolant will:
D Give freezing protection down to 34
_F ( 37
_C).
D Give boiling protection up to 265_F (129_C).
D Protect against rust and corrosion.
D Help keep the proper engine temperature.
D Let the warning lights and gages work as they should.
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important that you use only DEX COOL
R
(silicate free) coolant.
If coolant other than DEX COOL is added to the system, premature engine, heater core or radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine coolant will require change sooner - at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Damage caused by the use of coolant other than DEX COOL
R
is not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one half clean, drinkable water and one half DEX COOL
R
coolant which won’t damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you don’t need to add anything else.
6-22
CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid like alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning. Your engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX COOL
R
coolant.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year, have your dealer check your cooling system.
NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant, you don’t have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
The engine coolant recovery tank is located on the passenger’s side of the engine compartment, near the windshield.
NOTICE:
If you use an improper coolant mixture, your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL COLD mark or a little higher. When your engine is warm, the level should be up to the FULL HOT mark or a little higher.
6-23
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX COOL
R coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.
CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the engine and radiator are hot can allow steam and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you badly.
With the coolant recovery tank, you will almost never have to add coolant at the radiator.
Never turn the radiator pressure cap - even a little - when the engine and radiator are hot.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.
For information on how to add coolant to the radiator, see “Cooling System” in the Index.
Radiator Pressure Cap
NOTICE:
Your radiator cap is a 15 psi (105 kPa) pressure type cap and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss and possible engine damage from overheating. Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the overflow tube on the radiator filler neck.
CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
6-24
Power Steering Fluid
The power steering fluid reservoir is located on the rear passenger side of the engine compartment.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Turn the key off, let the engine compartment cool down, wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag.
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing.
6-25
Adding Washer Fluid
The washer fluid warning light will come on when the ignition switch is ON and the fluid container is less than one third full. On vehicles with the optional Driver
Information Center (DIC), a WASHER FLUID LOW message will be displayed and a chime will sound letting you know to add windshield washer fluid to your vehicle.
Open the cap labeled
WASHER FLUID. Add washer fluid until the tank is full.
NOTICE:
D When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
D Don’t mix water with ready to use washer fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze and damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of the washer system. Also, water doesn’t clean as well as washer fluid.
D Fill your washer fluid tank only three quarters full when it’s very cold.
This allows for expansion if freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if it is completely full.
D Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your windshield washer. It can damage your washer system and paint.
6-26
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is on the driver’s side of the engine compartment. It is filled with
DOT 3 brake fluid.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is hot enough. You or others could be burned, and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
6-27
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake warning light will come on. If your vehicle has the
Driver Information Center, the BRAKE FLUID LOW message will also be displayed. A chime will sound if you try to drive with this warning light on. See “Brake
System Warning Light” in the Index.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT 3 brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.
Refer to “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the
Maintenance Schedule.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This will help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake system, your brakes may not work well, or they may not even work at all. This could cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
NOTICE:
D Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake system parts. For example, just a few drops of mineral based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced. Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
D If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately. See “Appearance Care” in the Index.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built in wear indicators that make a high pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving (except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
6-28
CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon your brakes won’t work well. That could lead to an accident. When you hear the brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn out brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This does not mean something is wrong with your brakes.
See “Caliper/Knuckle Maintenance Inspection” in
Section 7 of this manual under Part C “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections.”
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenly torque wheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of this manual under Part C “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections.”
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
6-29
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well together if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested with top quality GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking system - for example, when your brake linings wear down and you have to have new ones put in - be sure you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes may no longer work properly.
For example, if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear brakes can change - for the worse. The braking performance you’ve come to expect can change in many other ways if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelco
R
battery. When it’s time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery’s label. We recommend an
ACDelco battery.
The battery is located under the rear seat cushion.
To access the battery, see “Removing the Rear Seat
Cushion” in the Index. You don’t need to access the battery to jump start your vehicle. See “Jump Starting” in the Index.
CAUTION:
A battery that isn’t properly vented can let sulfuric acid fumes into the area under the rear seat cushion. These fumes can damage your rear seat safety belt systems. You may not be able to see this damage, and the safety belts might not provide the protection needed in a crash. If a replacement battery is ever needed, it must be vented in the same manner as the original battery. Always make sure that the vent hose is properly reattached before reinstalling the seat cushion.
6-30
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days or more, remove the black, negative ( ) cable from the battery.
This will help keep your battery from running down.
CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in the Index for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt.
To be sure the vent hose (A) is properly attached, the vent hose connectors (B) must be securely reattached to the vent outlets (C) on each side of the battery, and the vent assembly grommet (D) must be secured to the floor pan (E).
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
6-31
Bulb Replacement
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer’s service department.
Halogen Bulbs
CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package.
If you go through a high pressure car wash, or it is very humid, your headlamps may “fog up.” This is normal.
The lenses should clear by themselves in time.
Headlamps
For the proper bulb type, see “Replacement Bulbs” in the Index.
1. Reach behind the headlamp assembly, push in and turn the bulb assembly counterclockwise to remove the bulb assembly from the headlamp assembly.
6-32
Headlamp Aiming
2. Lift the tabs to remove the bulb from the assembly.
3. Replace the bulb. Push the bulb assembly in and turn it clockwise to install the bulb assembly into the headlamp assembly.
Your vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming system equipped with horizontal aim indicators. The aim has been pre set at the factory and should need no further adjustment. This is true even though your horizontal aim indicators may not fall exactly on the “0”
(zero) marks on their scales.
6-33
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident, the headlamp aim may be affected. Aim adjustment to the low beam may be necessary if it is difficult to see lane markers
(for horizontal aim), or if oncoming drivers flash their high beams at you (for vertical aim). If you believe your headlamps need to be re aimed, we recommend that you take your vehicle to your dealer for service. However, it is possible for you to re aim your headlamps as described in the following procedure.
NOTICE:
To make sure your headlamps are aimed properly, read all the instructions before beginning. Failure to follow these instructions could cause damage to headlamp parts.
The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:
D The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are
25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall or other flat surface.
D The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly level surface which is level all the way to the wall or other flat surface.
D The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall or other flat surface.
D The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or mud attached to it.
D The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done.
D The vehicle should be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs. (75 kg) on the driver’s seat.
D Tires should be properly inflated.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle low beam lamps. The high beam lamps will be correctly aimed if the low beam lamps are aimed properly.
The headlamp aiming devices are under the hood near the headlamps.
6-34
Headlamp Horizontal Aiming
Turn the horizontal aiming screw (A) until the indicator (B) is lined up with zero.
If you believe your headlamps need horizontal
(left/right) adjustment, follow the horizontal aiming procedure. If you believe your headlamps need only vertical (up/down) adjustment, follow only the vertical aiming procedure.
Adjustment screws can be turned with an E8 Torx
R socket or T15 Torx screwdriver.
Once the horizontal aim is adjusted, then adjust the vertical aim.
6-35
Headlamp Vertical Aiming
1. Find the aim dot on the lens of the lamps.
2. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim dot on each lamp; if left low beam, subtract two inches.
Record this distance.
3. At the wall or other flat surface, measure from the floor to the recorded distance and draw a horizontal line the width of the vehicle.
4. Turn on the low beam headlamps and cover the lamp not being evaluated. The ambient light should allow the beam cut off to be seen on the wall.
6-36
5. Turn the vertical aiming screw (C) until the headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal line. It is recommended to cover the lamp that is not being evaluated to better see the beam being aimed.
6-37
Front Turn Signals and Parking Lamps
1. Remove the two bolts with a 10 mm socket.
2. Use a large screwdriver by the outside mount to separate the lamp assembly from the outboard snap mounting pin. Slide the headlamp assembly outward and lift it out.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness from the headlamp assembly.
6-38
4. Tip the headlamp assembly and while pressing the release, turn the bulb and socket counterclockwise to remove them.
5. Replace the bulb and socket. Then reconnect the wiring harness to the lamp assembly.
6. Slide the lamp assembly back into place by lining up the track on the bottom of the assembly with the guide on the vehicle. Then connect the outboard snap and secure the lamp assembly with the two bolts.
6-39
Rear Turn Signals, Stoplamps, Taillamps and Back-up Lamps
For the proper bulb type, see “Replacement Bulbs” in the Index.
1. Open the trunk. Turn the screws located inside of the trunk counterclockwise and remove them.
2. Remove the plastic trim piece from the trunk.
3. Pull the carpeting away from the rear corner of the trunk.
A. Back up Lamp
B. Turn Signal
C. Tail Lamp
D. Tail/Brake Lamp
6-40
4. Remove the three 10 mm nuts holding the lamp in place and remove the lamp assembly.
5. While pressing the release, turn the bulb socket assembly counterclockwise to remove it from the lamp assembly.
6. Pull the bulb straight out to remove it from the socket.
7. Replace the bulb and reverse the steps to reinstall the lamp assembly.
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Wiper Blade
Check” in the Index for more information.
To replace the wiper blade assembly:
1. Lift the wiper up from the windshield and set into the vertically locked position.
2. Press the tab that holds the wiper blade to the arm.
3. Slide the blade down and off the arm.
4. Slide in the new blade and snap into place.
For the proper windshield wiper blade replacement length and type, see “Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts” in the Index.
6-41
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your Pontiac Warranty booklet for details.
CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous.
D Overloading your tires can cause overheating as a result of too much friction.
You could have an air out and a serious accident. See “Loading Your Vehicle” in the Index.
CAUTION: (Continued)
CAUTION: (Continued)
D Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting accident could cause serious injury. Check all tires frequently to maintain the recommended pressure. Tire pressure should be checked when your tires are cold.
D Overinflated tires are more likely to be cut, punctured or broken by a sudden impact - such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
D Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been damaged, replace them.
Inflation -- Tire Pressure
The Tire Loading Information label, which is on the rear edge of the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
6-42
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get the following:
D Too much flexing
D Too much heat
D Tire overloading
D Bad wear
D Bad handling
D Bad fuel economy.
If your tires have too much air (overinflation), you can get the following:
D Unusual wear
D Bad handling
D Rough ride
D Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at
60 psi (420 kPa).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket type gage to check tire pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
Check Tire Pressure System
The check tire pressure system can alert you to a large change in the pressure of one tire. The system won’t alert you before you drive that a tire is low or flat.
You must begin driving before the system will work properly.
6-43
The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC) and the systems monitor TIRE PRESS light will come on if pressure difference (low pressure) is detected in one tire. The check tire pressure system may not alert you if:
D more than one tire is low,
D the vehicle is moving faster than 65 mph (105 km/h),
D the system is not yet calibrated,
D the tire treadwear is uneven,
D the compact spare tire is installed,
D tire chains are being used, or
D the vehicle is being driven on a rough or frozen road.
If the anti lock brake system warning light comes on, the check tire pressure system may not be working properly. See your dealer for service. (Also, see
“Anti Lock Brake System Warning Light” in the Index.)
The check tire pressure system detects differences in tire rotation speeds that are caused by changes in tire pressure. The system can alert you about a low tire - but it doesn’t replace normal tire maintenance.
See “Tires” in the Index.
When the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message appears on the Driver Information Center and the systems monitor TIRE PRESS light comes on, you should stop as soon as you can and check all your tires for damage.
(If a tire is flat, see “If a Tire Goes Flat” in the Index.)
Also check the tire pressure in all four tires as soon as you can. See “Inflation Tire Pressure” in the Index.
Any time you adjust a tire’s pressure or have one or more tires repaired or replaced, you’ll need to reset
(calibrate) the check tire pressure system. You’ll also need to reset the system whenever you rotate the tires, buy new tires, install or remove the compact spare, and whenever the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected.
Don’t reset the check tire pressure system without first correcting the cause of the problem and checking and adjusting the pressure in all four tires. If you reset the system when the tire pressures are incorrect, the check tire pressure system will not work properly and may not alert you when a tire is low or high.
To reset (calibrate) the system:
1. Turn the ignition switch to RUN.
2. Using the MODE and SELECT buttons, change the
DIC to display TIRE PRESSURE.
3. Press and hold the RESET button for about five seconds.
6-44
4. The display should change to read TIRE PRESSURE
RESET. If TIRE PRESSURE RESET does not appear on the display after about five seconds, see your dealer for service.
5. When you release the button after seeing the TIRE
PRESSURE RESET message, the display will change to read TIRE PRESSURE NORMAL.
To reset (calibrate) the system with a systems monitor:
D Turn the ignition switch to RUN.
D Press and hold the TIRE PRESS RESET button for about five seconds.
D The TIRE PRESS light on the systems monitor should begin to flash. If the TIRE PRESS light does not begin to flash after about five seconds, see your dealer for service.
D Release the TIRE PRESS RESET button and the system should reset (the TIRE PRESS telltale light goes out).
The system completes the calibration process during driving. Calibration time can take 45 to 90 minutes, depending on your driving habits. After the system has been calibrated, the system will alert the driver that a tire is low, up to a maximum speed of
65 mph (105 km/h).
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
See “When It’s Time for New Tires” and “Wheel
Replacement” later in this section for more information.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled rotation intervals.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation pattern shown here.
6-45
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire Loading
Information label. Reset the Check Tire Pressure
System. See “Check Tire Pressure System” in the Index.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” in the Index.
When It’s Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which will appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.
CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after a time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
(See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index.)
You need a new tire if any of the following statements are true:
D You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire.
D You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber.
D The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
D The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
D The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that can’t be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage.
6-46
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at the Tire Loading Information label.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, get ones with that same TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and other things during normal service on your vehicle. If your tires have an all season tread design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating and construction type
(bias, bias belted or radial) as your original tires.
CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial and bias belted tires), the vehicle may not handle properly, and you could have a crash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same size and type tires on all wheels.
It’s all right to drive with your compact spare, though. It was developed for use on your vehicle.
CAUTION:
If you use bias ply tires on your vehicle, the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only radial ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
6-47
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system does not apply to deep tread, winter type snow tires, space saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some limited production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these grades, they must also conform to Federal safety requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
--
AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
6-48
Temperature
--
A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
6-49
CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose control. You could have a collision in which you or others could be injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
NOTICE:
The wrong wheel can also cause problems with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain clearance to the body and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more information.
6-50
Used Replacement Wheels
CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used or how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly and cause an accident. If you have to replace a wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
NOTICE:
If your vehicle has P235/55R17 size tires, don’t use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle because there’s not enough clearance.
NOTICE: (Continued)
NOTICE: (Continued)
Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions. To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install them on the front tires.
If you have other tires, use tire chains only where legal and only when you must. Use only SAE Class
“S” type chains that are the proper size for your tires. Install them on the front tires and tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage your vehicle.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic. Others can burst into flame if you strike a match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed space.
When you use anything from a container to clean your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. And always open your doors or windows when you’re cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
D Gasoline
D Benzene
D Naphtha
D Carbon Tetrachloride
D Acetone
D Paint Thinner
D Turpentine
D Lacquer Thinner
D Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous - some more than others - and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
6-51
Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
D Alcohol
D Laundry Soap
D Bleach
D Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
Cleaning of Fabric/Carpet
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi Purpose Interior
Cleaner and Capture Non Solvent Dry Spot and Soil
Remover for cleaning fabric and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very well. You can get
GM approved cleaning products from your dealer.
(See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)
Here are some cleaning tips:
D Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
D Clean up stains as soon as you can - before they set.
D Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
D Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are stubborn.
D If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on the container label to form thick suds.
4. Use suds only and apply with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge to remove the suds.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
6-52
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black), egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the multi purpose interior cleaner instructions described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for
Multi Purpose Interior Cleaner.
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
D Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
You may have to do it more than once.
D Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth and a vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
D For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
D Never use oils, varnishes, solvent based or abrasive cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
D Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish, it can harm the leather.
6-53
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it difficult to see through the windshield under certain conditions.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the surface finish.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it may severely weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass.
(See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)
Don’t use abrasive cleaners on glass, because they may cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window, since they may have to be scraped off later.
If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the defogger grid.
Cleaning the Outside of the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or windshield.
6-54
Clean the outside of the windshield with GM
Windshield Cleaner, Bon Ami
R
Powder (non scratching glass cleaning powder), GM Part No. 1050011. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full strength windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary; replace blades that look worn.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be required. (See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t use strong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM approved cleaning products from your dealer.
(See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)
Don’t use cleaning agents that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all cotton towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle.
6-55
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. You can get GM approved cleaning products from your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the Index.)
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
NOTICE:
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
6-56
Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome
-
Plated
Wheels (If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners, cleaners with acid or abrasive cleaning brushes on them because you could damage the surface. Do not use chrome polish on any wheels other than chrome plated wheels.
Use chrome polish only on chrome plated wheels, but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off immediately after application.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner.
NOTICE:
When applying a tire dressing always take care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum based products may damage the paint finish and tires.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti corrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
6-57
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into a major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch up materials available from your dealer or other service outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust control can collect on the underbody. If these are not removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system even though they have corrosion protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud and other debris can collect. Dirt packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can do this for you.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet shaped discolorations, and small irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, Pontiac will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.
6-58
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
PART NUMBER
994954
1050172
1050173
1050174
1050214
1050427
1052918**
1052925
1052929
1052930
12345721
12345725
12377964*
12377966*
12377984*
SIZE DESCRIPTION
23 in. x 25 in.
Polishing Cloth – Wax Treated
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
USAGE
Exterior polishing cloth
Tar and Road Oil Remover Removes tar, road oil and asphalt
Chrome Cleaner and Polish Use on chrome, stainless steel, nickel, copper and brass
16 oz. (0.473 L) White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
32 oz. (0.946 L) Vinyl Cleaner
23 oz. (0.680 L) Glass Cleaner
8 oz. (0.237 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
8 oz. (0.237 L)
2.5 sq. ft.
12 oz. (0.354 L)
Armor All t Protectant
Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner
Wheel Cleaner
Capture Dry Spot Remover
Synthetic Chamois
Removes soil and black marks from whitewalls
Cleans vinyl tops, upholstery and convertible tops
Removes dirt, grime, smoke and fingerprints
Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas t, plastic, rubber and vinyl
Cleans carpets, seats, interior trim, door panels and floor mats
Spray on and rinse with water
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Silicone Tire Shine
Finish Enhancer
Cleaner Wax
Surface Cleaner
Attracts, absorbs and removes soils on fabric
Shines vehicle without scratching
Spray on tire shine
Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants
Removes light scratches and oxidation and protects finish
Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
* For exterior use only.
** Not recommended for use on instrument panels.
6-59
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
D the model designation,
D paint information and
D a list of all production options and special equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine, specifications and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on your spare tire cover. It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this label is:
D your VIN,
6-60
NOTICE:
Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle unless you check with your dealer first. Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty. Some add on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag Equipped Vehicle” in the Index.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuit breaker. An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in some cases to remain off.
If this happens, have your headlamp system checked right away.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem, be sure to have it fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers in the rear electrical center protect the power windows and other power accessories. When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of damage caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver colored band inside the fuse. If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that you can get along without lighter
- like the radio or cigarette
- and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
The MaxiFuses are located in two Bussed Electrical
Centers (BEC), one located near the engine compartment on the passenger’s side and the other under the rear seat on the driver’s side. If a MaxiFuse should blow, have your vehicle serviced by your dealer immediately.
Removing Fuses
You will find a fuse puller attached in both of the BEC.
Snap the wide end of the fuse puller on to the fuse, at the side indentations holding the puller and pull the fuse out.
6-61
Engine Compartment Bussed Electrical
Center (BEC)
As mentioned above, the front BEC is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger’s side. Lift the cover to gain access.
Fuse 22 or 23 can be moved to the outer position to enable the accessory power outlet or cigarette lighter when the ignition is not on. See your dealer for additional assistance, if needed.
5
6
3
4
7
8
Minifuse
1
2
6-62
Usage
Not Used
Accessory
Windshield Wipers
Not Used
Headlamp Low Beam Left
Headlamp Low Beam Right
Spare
Powertrain Control
Module Battery
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
14
15
16
17
18
19
11
12
13
Minifuse
9
10
Usage
Headlamp High Beam Right
Headlamp High Beam Left
Ignition 1
Not Used
Transaxle
Cruise Control
DIS
Injector Bank #2
Not Used
Not Used
Powertrain Control
Module Ignition
Oxygen Sensor
Injector Bank #1
Auxiliary Power
Cigar Lighter
Fog Lamps/Daytime
Running Lamps
Horn
Air Conditioning Clutch
30
31
32
33
Mirco Relay
27
28
29
36
37
38
39
40
Mini Relay
34
35
Usage
Headlamp High Beam
Headlamp Low Beam
Fog Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps
Horn
Air Conditioning Clutch
HVAC Solenoid
Usage
Accessory
Air Pump
Starter 1
Cooling Fan Secondary
Ignition 1
Cooling Fan Series/Parallel
Cooling Fan Primary
6-63
Maxibreaker
41
48
49
50
51
52
53
44
45
46
47
Maxifuse
42
43
Usage
Starter
Usage
Air
Antilock Brake System
Not Used
Not Used
Cooling Fan Secondary
Cooling Fan Primary
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Fuse Puller
6-64
Removing the Rear Seat Cushion
NOTICE:
The battery and main fuse boxes are located under the rear seat cushion. The battery’s ground terminal and some relay wires are exposed. To help avoid damage to the battery and wires, be careful when removing or reinstalling the seat cushion. Do not remove covers from covered parts. Do not store anything under the seat, as objects could touch exposed wires and cause a short.
To remove the rear seat cushion:
1. Pull up on the front of the cushion to release the front hooks.
2. Pull the cushion up and out toward the front of the vehicle.
To reinstall the rear seat cushion:
CAUTION:
A safety belt that isn’t properly routed through the seat cushion or is twisted won’t provide the protection needed in a crash. If the safety belt hasn’t been routed through the seat cushion at all, it won’t be there to work for the next passenger. The person sitting in that position could be badly injured. After reinstalling the seat cushion, always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and are not twisted.
1. Buckle the center passenger position safety belt, then route the safety belts through the proper slots in the seat cushion. Don’t let the safety belts get twisted.
2. Slide the rear of the cushion up and under the seatback so the rear locating guides hook into the wire loops on the back frame.
6-65
3. With the seat cushion lowered, push rearward and then press down on the seat cushion until the spring locks on both ends engage.
4. Check to make sure the safety belts are properly routed and that no portion of any safety belt is trapped under the seat. Also make sure the seat cushion is secured.
Rear Underseat Bussed Electrical
Center (BEC)
The rear BEC is located below the rear seat on the driver’s side. The rear seat cushion must be removed to access the BEC. See
“Removing the Rear Seat
Cushion” in the Index.
3
4
5
6
7
8
Minifuse
1
2
6-66
Usage
Fuel Pump
Heater, Ventilation, Air
Conditioning Blower
Memory Seat
Assembly Line Diagnostic Link
Not Used
CD
Driver Door Module
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
24
25
26
27
28
19
20
21
22
23
14
15
16
17
18
11
12
13
Minifuse
9
10
Usage
Not Used
Lamps Park Right
Ventilation Solenoid
Ignition 1
Lamps Park Left
Interior Lamp Dimmer Module
Not Used
Heated Seat Left Front
Not Used
Rear Door Modules
Stoplamps
PARK (P) / REVERSE (R)
Audio
Retained Accessory Power
Not Used
Not Used
Passenger Door Module
Body
Interior Lamps
Not Used
31
32
33
Minifuse
29
30
34
35
36
37
38
41
42
43
44
45
Micro Relay
39
40
Usage
Ignition Switch
Instrument Panel
Heated Seat Right Front
Not Used
Heating, Ventilation,
Air Conditioning
Ignition 3 Rear
Antilock Brake System
Turn Signal/Hazard
HVAC Battery
Dash Integration Module
Usage
Fuel Pump
Parking Lamps
Ignition 1
Not Used
Not Used
Park Brake
Reverse Lamps
6-67
Mini Relay
58
59
6-68
Usage
Cigarette Lighter
Rear Defog
69
70
71
72
65
66
67
68
73
74
75
Maxifuse
60
61
62
63
64
Usage
Not Used
Rear Defog
Not Used
Audio Amplifier
Electronic Level Control
Compressor/Exhaust
Cigarette Lighter
Not Used
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Fuse Puller
Replacement Bulbs
If your vehicle is equipped with the Driver Information
Center, the messages will also appear on the Lamp
Monitor to alert you that a bulb needs to be replaced.
Exterior Lamps
Front
Parking/Turn Lamps
Halogen Headlamps
Low Beam
High Beam
Rear
Taillamps
Back up Lamps
Stoplamps
Turn
Bulb
3157NA
9006
9005
3057
3057
3057
3157
For service information on other bulbs, contact your dealer’s service department.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index for more information.
Engine Specifications
3800 V6 Series II Engine (L36)
VIN Engine Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K
Displacement
Horsepower
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8 Liters
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 hp
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermostat Temperature
1 6 5 4 3 2
. . . . . . . . . . 195
_F (91_C)
3800 V6 Series II Supercharged Engine (L67)
VIN Engine Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8 Liters
Horsepower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 hp
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermostat Temperature
1 6 5 4 3 2
. . . . . . . . . . 195
_F (91_C)
Tire Pressures . . . . . See Tire Loading Information label on the driver’s door.
6-69
Wheel Nut Torque
100 lb ft (140 N·m)
Capacities
Automatic Transaxle (Overdrive)
Pan Removal and
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Complete Overhaul . . . . . . . .
7.4 quarts (7.0 L)
10.0 quarts (9.5 L)
When draining or replacing torque converter, more fluid may be needed.
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0 quarts (9.5 L)
Engine Crankcase . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil change with filter change
4.5 quarts (4.3L)
Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.5 gallons (70.0 L)
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . See refrigerant charge label under the hood.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this manual.
Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts
Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type A 1096C
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
(HVAC Air Filter) . . . . . . . . GM Part No. 25654414
Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type PF 47
Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type GF 627
Transaxle Filter
Spark Plugs
. . . . . . . . . . . . GM Part No. 8651909
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC Type 41 921*
Gap: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm)
Windshield Wiper Blades
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shepard’s Hook
22 inches (56 cm)
*On 3800 V6 Supercharged Engine (Code 1) only, this replaces original spark plug NGK Type PTR4B 15.
6-70
Vehicle Dimensions
Wheelbase
Tread Width
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112.2 inches (285.0 cm)
Front
Rear
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62.4 inches (158.5 cm)
62.3 inches (158.2 cm)
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202.6 inches (514.6 cm)
Width
Height
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73.8 inches (187.5 cm)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56.0 inches (142.2 cm)
L36 Engine Accessory Belt
The 3800 V6 (L36) engine uses an engine accessory belt. This diagram shows the features connected and the routing. See “Maintenance Schedule” in the Index for when to check the belt.
A. Power Steering
B. Generator
C. Air Conditioning
D. Crank
E. Coolant Pump
F. Idler
6-71
L67 Engine Accessory Belt
The Supercharged 3800 V6 (L67) engine uses two accessory drive belts. The inner belt drives the generator, power steering pump, coolant pump and air conditioning. The outer belt drives the supercharger.
Each belt has its own tensioner and idler pulley. See
“Maintenance Schedule” in the Index for when to check the accessory drive belts and the supercharger oil level.
Have your dealer check the oil level in the supercharger.
1. Front Belt
2. Back Belt
A. Generator
B. Power Steering Pump
C. Crank
D. Supercharger
E. Coolant Pump
F. Air Conditioning
6-72
Section 7 Maintenance Schedule
This section covers the maintenance required for your vehicle. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety, dependability and emission control performance.
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
7 Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
20 Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
7 28 Part B: Owner Checks and Services
7 32 Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
7 34 Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
7 36 Part E: Maintenance Record
7-
7-1
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet, or your dealer
for details.
Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the environment. All recommended maintenance procedures are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good working condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow recommended maintenance may not be covered by warranty.
7-2
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows what to have done and how often. Some of these services can be complex, so unless you are technically qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should let your dealer’s service department or another qualified service center do these jobs.
CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work only if you have the required know how and the proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified technician do the work.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what should be checked and when. It also explains what you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains important inspections that your dealer’s service department or another qualified service center should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists some recommended products necessary to help keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their equivalents, should be used whether you do the work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to record and keep track of the maintenance performed on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts.
They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for warranty repairs.
If you want to get the service information, see “Service and Owner Publications” in the Index.
7-3
Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know exactly how you’ll drive it. You may drive very short distances only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more frequent checks and replacements. So please read the following and note how you drive. If you have any questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition, see your dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should have done and when you should schedule them. If you go to your dealer for your service needs, you’ll know that GM trained and supported service people will perform the work using genuine GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses these. All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle.
These schedules are for vehicles that:
D carry passengers and cargo within recommended limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Tire Loading Information label. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
D are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal driving limits.
D use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedules is right for your vehicle. Here’s how to decide which schedule to follow:
7-4
Scheduled Maintenance
Short Trip/City Definition
Follow the Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance if any one of these conditions is true for your vehicle:
D Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside temperatures are below freezing.
D Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent driving in stop and go traffic).
D Most trips are through dusty areas.
D You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of your vehicle.
D If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi or other commercial application.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions is that these conditions cause engine oil to break down sooner.
Short Trip/City Intervals
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 12,000 Miles (20 000 km): Passenger
Compartment Air Filter Replacement (if equipped).
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement. Supercharger Oil Check
(or every 36 months, whichever occurs first)
(3800 Code 1 V6 engine only).
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection.
(Continued)
7-5
Scheduled Maintenance
Short Trip/City Intervals
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Automatic
Transaxle Service (normal conditions).
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance on the following pages.
Long Trip/Highway Definition
Follow this scheduled maintenance only if none of the conditions from the Short Trip/City Scheduled
Maintenance are true. Do not use this schedule if the vehicle is used for trailer towing, driven in a dusty area or used off paved roads. Use the Short Trip/City schedule for these conditions.
Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to break down slower.
7-6
Long Trip/Highway Intervals
Every 7,500 Miles (12 500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
Tire Rotation.
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Supercharger Oil
Check (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first)
(3800 Code 1 V6 engine only). Engine Air Cleaner
Filter Replacement.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic Transaxle
Service (severe conditions only).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166 000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement. Automatic
Transaxle Service (normal conditions).
Every 150,000 Miles (240 000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every 60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete scheduled maintenance on the following pages.
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
Footnotes
[ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded.
* If your vehicle has a GM Oil Life System t, the system will show you when to change the oil - usually between
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and 7,500 miles (12 500 km) since your last oil change. Under severe conditions, the indicator may come on before 3,000 miles (5 000 km).
Never drive your vehicle more than 7,500 miles
(12 500 km) or 12 months, (whichever occurs first), without an oil and filter change.
The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So if you drive in a dusty area be sure to change your oil every
3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner if the ENGINE OIL
CHANGE SOON message appears on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). Remember to reset the Oil
Life System whenever the oil is changed. For more information, see “Oil Life System” in the Index.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under
“Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.
7-7
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
3,000 Miles (5 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
6,000 Miles (10 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
9,000 Miles (15 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
12,000 Miles (20 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-8
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
15,000 Miles (25 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.
Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.)
18,000 Miles (30 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
21,000 Miles (35 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-9
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
24,000 Miles (40 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
27,000 Miles (45 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
30,000 Miles (50 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service. j For supercharged engines only: Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as needed (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first). See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in this section.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-10
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
33,000 Miles (55 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
36,000 Miles (60 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
39,000 Miles (65 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-11
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
42,000 Miles (70 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.
Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.)
48,000 Miles (80 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-12
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
50,000 Miles (83 000 km) j Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90
_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km).
51,000 Miles (85 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
54,000 Miles (90 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-13
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
57,000 Miles (95 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
60,000 Miles (100 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter.
j Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. j Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service. j For supercharged engines only: Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as needed (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first). See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in this section.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-14
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
63,000 Miles (105 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
66,000 Miles (110 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
69,000 Miles (115 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
72,000 Miles (120 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-15
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
75,000 Miles (125 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions.
Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.)
78,000 Miles (130 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
81,000 Miles (135 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-16
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
84,000 Miles (140 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
87,000 Miles (145 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
90,000 Miles (150 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service. j For supercharged engines only: Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as needed (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first). See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in this section.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-17
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
93,000 Miles (155 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
96,000 Miles (160 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
99,000 Miles (165 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km) j Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service. j Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
7-18
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
Short Trip/City Scheduled Maintenance
j Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90
_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transaxle fluid, change both the fluid and filter.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km) j Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-19
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals. The services shown at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
Footnotes
[ The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded.
* If your vehicle has the GM Oil Life System t, the system will show you when to change the engine oil and filter - usually between 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and
7,500 miles (12 500 km) since your last oil change.
Under severe conditions, the indicator may come on before 3,000 miles (5 000 km). Never drive your vehicle more than 7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months without an oil and filter change.
The system won’t detect dust in the oil. So if you drive in a dusty area, be sure to change your oil and filter every
3,000 miles (5 000 km) or sooner if the ENGINE OIL
CHANGE SOON message appears on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). Remember to reset the Oil
Life System whenever the oil is changed. For more information, see “Oil Life System” in the Index.
+ A good time to check your brakes is during tire rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under
“Periodic Maintenance Inspections” in Part C of this schedule.
7-20
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
7,500 Miles (12 500 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
22,500 Miles (37 500 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-21
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
30,000 Miles (50 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) j Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service. j For supercharged engines only: Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as needed (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first). See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in this section.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.)
37,500 Miles (62 500 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
SERVICED BY:
7-22
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
45,000 Miles (75 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km) j Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90
_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter at 100,000 miles (166 000 km).
52,500 Miles (87 500 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-23
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
60,000 Miles (100 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter.
j For supercharged engines only: Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as needed (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first). See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in this section.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.) j Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service. j Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
67,500 Miles (112 500 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
SERVICED BY:
7-24
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
75,000 Miles (125 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter.
j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
82,500 Miles (137 500 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j If Equipped: Replace passenger compartment air filter.
j Replace engine air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
(Continued)
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
SERVICED BY:
SERVICED BY:
7-25
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance
90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued) j For supercharged engines only: Check the supercharger oil level and add oil as needed (or every 36 months, whichever occurs first). See “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in this section.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote
[.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km) j Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote *.) j Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km) j Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service. j Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
SERVICED BY:
7-26
Long Trip/Highway Scheduled Maintenance j Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these conditions:
– In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches
90
_F (32_C) or higher.
– In hilly or mountainous terrain.
– When doing frequent trailer towing.
– Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
j If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transaxle fluid, change both the fluid and filter.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km) j Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service, whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-27
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Listed in this part are owner checks and services which should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety, dependability and emission control performance of your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important for you or a service station attendant to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for further details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX COOL
R coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary. See “Windshield Washer Fluid” in the Index for further details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tires are inflated to the correct pressures.
Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See “Tires” in the
Index for further details.
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning should be done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the Index for further details.
7-28
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, damp weather more frequent application may be required. (See “Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)
Automatic Transaxle Check
Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. See
“Automatic Transaxle Fluid” in the Index. A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair if needed.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all hinges and latches, including those for the hood, rear compartment, glove box door, console door and any folding seat hardware. Part D tells you what to use. More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
7-29
Starter Switch Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake (see “Parking
Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the regular brake.
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your vehicle needs service.
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could move suddenly. If it does, you or others could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake (see “Parking Brake” in the Index if necessary).
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
7-30
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
D The key should turn to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
D The key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle PARK (P)
Mechanism Check
CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of your vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the parking brake.
D To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
D To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the regular brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris can collect.
7-31
Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which should be performed at least twice a year (for instance, each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s service department or other qualified service center do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be found in a service manual. See “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering lines and hoses for proper hook up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace seals if necessary.
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged, missing or out of position parts as well as open seams, holes, loose connections or other conditions which could cause a heat build up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended at least once a year.
7-32
Throttle System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding, and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed. Replace any components that have high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables.
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and hoses for proper hook up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, parking brake, etc. You may need to have your brakes inspected more often if your driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
7-33
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number or specification may be obtained from your dealer.
USAGE
Engine Oil
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Engine Oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol of the proper viscosity. To determine the preferred viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, see
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only GM
Goodwrench
R
DEX
Havoline
R
DEX -
COOL
COOL
R
R
or
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index.
USAGE
Hydraulic
Brake System
Windshield
Washer Solvent
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Power
Steering System
Automatic
Transaxle
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Delco Supreme 11
R
Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or equivalent DOT 3 Brake Fluid).
GM Optikleen
R
Washer Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515) or equivalent.
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12377985 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2, Category LB or GC LB.
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM
Part No. 1052884 1 pint,
1050017 1 quart, or equivalent).
DEXRON
R
III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
7-34
USAGE
Key
Lock Cylinders
Supercharger
Floor
Shift Linkage
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Multi Purpose Lubricant,
Superlube
R
(GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Supercharger Oil (GM Part
No. 12345982). See “Supercharger
Oil” in the Index.
Lubriplate
R
Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2
Category LB or GC LB.
USAGE
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary Latch,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
Hood and
Door Hinges
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Lubriplate
R
Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or equivalent) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LB or GC LB.
Multi Purpose Lubricant,
Superlube
R
(GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
7-35
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval.
Any additional information from “Owner Checks and
Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” can be added on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio is a convenient place to store them.
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
READING SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-36
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
Maintenance Record
SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-37
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
Maintenance Record
SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-38
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
Maintenance Record
SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-39
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
Maintenance Record
SERVICED BY MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-40
Section 8 Customer Assistance Information
Here you will find out how to contact Pontiac if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain service publications and how to report any safety defects.
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities
Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program
8 12 Reporting Safety Defects to the United
8 12 Reporting Safety Defects to the
8 13 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors
8 13 Ordering Owner Publications in Canada
8-
8-1
Pontiac Cares
With PONTIAC CARES, you are never more than a phone call away from having your concern taken care of.
8-2
The PONTIAC CARES philosophy and elements are designed to make you realize that Pontiac recognizes you as a valuable customer, appreciates your purchase decision, and is dedicated to taking care of the most important person ... YOU! PONTIAC CARES is: A valuable feature that comes with every Pontiac, a feature that offers a multitude of benefits that can give you safety, security, comfort and convenience.
What Makes Up Pontiac Cares?
D A 3 year/36,000 mile (60 000 km)
Bumper to Bumper Warranty
D Customer Assistance
D Roadside Assistance
D Courtesy Transportation
All of these elements combine to make your driving experience an enjoyable one and are discussed in greater detail in your owner’s manual. Pontiac is focusing on the changing needs of our customers and is committed to giving you an exceptional level of customer care throughout your ownership experience. Our goal is to create total customer enthusiasm in our product and our services and make you the most satisfied customer in the world.
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
8-3
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the general manager.
STEP TWO -- If after contacting a member of dealership management, it appears your concern cannot be resolved by the dealership without further help, contact the Pontiac Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-762-2737. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
D Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel and visible through the windshield.)
D Dealership name and location
D Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Pontiac, please remember that your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you have a concern.
STEP THREE -- Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, file with the
GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
8-4
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you are required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing any court action, use of the program is free of charge and your case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB using the toll free telephone number or write them at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203 1804
Telephone: 1 800 955 5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its participation in this program.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Pontiac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with Pontiac by dialing: 1 800 833 PONT (7668).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1 800 263 3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
Pontiac encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write to
Pontiac, the letter should be addressed to Pontiac’s
Customer Assistance Center.
United States
Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 436008
Pontiac, MI 48343-6008
1-800-762-2737 or
1-800-833-7668 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)
8-5
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
All Overseas Locations
GMODC Customer Communication Centre
169-007
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Telephone: 905-644-4112
Fax: 905-644-4866
Caribbean Numbers
1-800-496-9992 (English) Puerto Rico
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish) Puerto Rico
1-800-751-4135 (English) Dominican Republic
1-800-751-4136 (Spanish) Dominican Republic
1-800-496-9994 U.S. Virgin Islands
1-800-389-0009 Bahamas
1-800-534-0122 Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua & B.V.I.
If toll free service is not available in the Caribbean, call Puerto Rico 1-787-763-1315.
8-6
GM Mobility Program for Persons with Disabilities
This program, available to qualified applicants, can reimburse you up to $1,000 toward aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may require for your vehicle (hand controls, wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource information, such as area driver assessment centers and mobility equipment installers. The program is available for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call the GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1
800 323 9935.
800 833 9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1 800 GM DRIVE (463 7483) for details. When calling from outside Canada, please dial 1 905 644 3063.
All TTY users call 1 800 263 3830.
8-7
Pontiac Roadside Assistance Program
Security While You Travel
1 800 ROADSIDE (1 800 762 3743)
As the proud owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you are automatically enrolled in the Pontiac Roadside
Assistance program. This value added service is intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive in the city or travel the open road.
Pontiac’s Roadside Assistance toll free number is staffed by a team of technically trained advisors, who are available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We take anxiety out of uncertain situations by providing minor repair information over the phone or making arrangements to tow your vehicle to the nearest
Pontiac dealer.
We will provide the following services for
3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km), at no expense to you:
D Fuel delivery
D Keys locked in vehicle
D Tow to nearest dealership for warranty service
D Change a flat tire
D Jump starts
D Courtesy Transportation -- See Courtesy
Transportation section for details
8-8
We have quick, easy access to telephone numbers of the following additional services depending on your needs:
D Hotels
D Glass replacement
D Tire repair facilities
D Rental vehicle or taxis
D Airports or train stations
D Police, fire department or hospitals
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered under Pontiac’s comprehensive warranty. However, when other services are utilized, our advisors will explain any payment obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please provide the following information to give the advisor:
D Location of vehicle
D Telephone number of your location
D Vehicle model, year and color
D Mileage of vehicle
D Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
D Vehicle license plate number
Pontiac reserves the right to limit services or reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in Pontiac’s judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our service, it is added security while traveling for you and your family. Remember, we’re only a phone call away.
Pontiac Roadside Assistance - 1 800 ROADSIDE or 1 800 762 3743.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
1 800 268 6800 for emergency services.
8-9
Courtesy Transportation
Pontiac has always exemplified quality and value in its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership experience, we and our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer support program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper to Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options are available when warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is safety related.
If it is, please call your dealership, let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you wait. However, if you are unable to wait Pontiac helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several transportation options. Depending on the circumstances, your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle service to get you to your destination with minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum) may be available for the use of public transportation such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses up to
$10 per day (five day maximum) may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts.
8-10
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to a maximum of
$30.00 per day supported by receipts. This requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper to Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information” furnished with each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating dealers and all program options, such as shuttle service, may not be available at every dealer.
Please contact your dealer for specific information about availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty, alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein at its sole discretion.
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes with a separate warranty booklet that contains detailed warranty information.
8-11
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1 800 424 9393 (or 366 0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the hotline.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE CANADIAN
GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
8-12
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us. Please call us at 1–800–762-2737, or write:
Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 436008
Pontiac, MI 48343-6008
In Canada, please call us at 1 800 263 3777 (English) or 1 800 263 7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Ordering Owner Publications in Canada
Owner’s manuals are available for purchase for all current and most past model General Motors vehicles.
The toll-free telephone number for ordering information in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
8-13
2000 PONTIAC SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering the operation and servicing of your vehicle can be purchased by filling out the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing it in with your check, money order, or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR 2000 PONTIAC
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publications are written directly for Owners and intended to provide basic operational information about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
Schedule for all models.
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
2000 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $20.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Bulletins give technical service information needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications are available for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETE THE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAIL TO:
Helm, Incorporated S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207
8-14
OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA–MasterCard–Discover)
0
0
2
0
ORDER TOLL FREE
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)
1-800-551-4123
(Monday-Friday 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM EST)
FAX Orders Only 1-313-865-5927
Orders will be mailed within 10 days of receipt. Please allow adequate time for postal service. If further information is needed, write to the address shown below or call
1-800-551-4123. Material cannot be returned for credit without packing slip with return information within 30 days of delivery. On returns, a re-stocking fee may be applied against the original order.
ITEM DESCRIPTION
VEHICLE MODEL
NAME YEAR
QTY.
PRICE
EACH*
TOTAL
PRICE
2000 $120.00
Service Manual
Car & Light Truck
Transmission Unit Repair
2000 $50.00
Owner’s Manual In Portfolio 2000 $20.00
Owner’s Manual Without Portfolio 2000 $15.00
G
M
S
H
I
P
T
O
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Mail completed order form to:
HELM, INCORPORATED S P.O. Box 07130 S Detroit, MI 48207
For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the above address for quotation.
(CUSTOMER’S NAME)
(STREET ADDRESS—NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
(CITY)
(ATTENTION)
DAYTIME TELEPHONE NO.
GM-PON-ORD99
(ZIP CODE) (STATE)
( )
AREA CODE
*(Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)
P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
Check or Money
Order payable to
Helm, Inc. (USA funds only — do not send cash.)
MasterCard
VISA
Discover
Account
Number:
Expiration
Date mo/yr:
TOTAL MATERIAL
Michigan Purchasers add 6% sales tax
U.S. Order Processing
Canadian Postage
(See Note Below)
GRAND TOTAL
$6.00
Check here if your billing address is different from your shipping address shown.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents
U.S. order processing.
advertisement